Rosemount Micro Motion 1600 Owner's Manual

Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600, Rev AA
May 2024
Micro Motion™ 1600 Transmitters with
Configurable Inputs and Outputs
Configuration and Use Manual
Safety messages
Safety messages are provided throughout this manual to protect personnel and equipment. Read each safety
message carefully before proceeding to the next step.
Safety and approval information
This Micro Motion product complies with all applicable European directives when properly installed in accordance
with the instructions in this manual. Refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for directives that apply to this
product. The following are available: the EU Declaration of Conformity, with all applicable European directives, and the
complete ATEX installation drawings and instructions. In addition, the IECEx installation instructions for installations
outside of the European Union and the CSA installation instructions for installations in North America are available at
Emerson.com or through your local Micro Motion support center.
Information affixed to equipment that complies with the Pressure Equipment Directive, can be found at
Emerson.com. For hazardous installations in Europe, refer to standard EN 60079-14 if national standards do not
apply.
Other information
Troubleshooting information can be found in the appropriate Configuration and Use Manual. Product Data Sheets
and Manuals are available from the Micro Motion website at Emerson.com.
Return policy
Follow Emerson procedures when returning equipment. These procedures ensure legal compliance with government
transportation agencies and help provide a safe working environment for Emerson employees. If you fail to follow
Emerson procedures, then Emerson will not accept your returned equipment.
Return procedures and forms are available on our web support site at Emerson.com, or by calling the Micro Motion
Customer Service department.
2
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Contents
May 2024
Contents
Chapter 1
Before you begin....................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 About this manual....................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Hazard messages........................................................................................................................ 7
1.3 Cybersecurity............................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Related documentation............................................................................................................ 10
1.5 Communication methods.........................................................................................................10
Chapter 2
Quick start............................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Power up the transmitter......................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Check meter status................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Commissioning wizards............................................................................................................12
2.4 Make a startup connection to the transmitter...................................................................... 12
2.5 Set the transmitter clock.......................................................................................................... 12
2.6 View the licensed features (optional)......................................................................................13
2.7 Set informational parameters................................................................................................. 13
2.8 Characterize the meter (if required)....................................................................................... 14
2.9 Verify mass flow measurement............................................................................................... 16
2.10 Verify the zero..........................................................................................................................17
Chapter 3
Introduction to configuration and commissioning............................................................ 19
3.1 Security and write protection.................................................................................................. 19
3.2 Work with configuration files...................................................................................................23
Chapter 4
Configure process measurement..........................................................................................27
4.1 Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow ................................................................................ 27
4.2 Configure mass flow measurement........................................................................................28
4.3 Configure volume flow measurement for liquid applications.............................................32
4.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume (GSV) flow measurement.................................................36
4.5 Configure density measurement............................................................................................ 41
4.6 Configure temperature measurement...................................................................................43
4.7 Configure Pressure Measurement Unit .................................................................................45
4.8 Configure Velocity Measurement Unit .................................................................................. 46
Chapter 5
Configure process measurement applications................................................................... 47
5.1 Set up the API Referral application ........................................................................................ 47
5.2 Set up concentration measurement....................................................................................... 59
Chapter 6
Configure advanced options for process measurement....................................................71
6.1 Configure Response Time ....................................................................................................... 71
6.2 Detect and report two-phase flow.......................................................................................... 71
6.3 Configure Flow Rate Switch .....................................................................................................72
6.4 Configure events....................................................................................................................... 73
6.5 Configure totalizers and inventories...................................................................................... 75
6.6 Configure logging for totalizers and inventories.................................................................. 78
6.7 Configure Process Variable Fault Action ............................................................................... 79
Configuration and Use Manual
3
Contents
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Chapter 7
Configure device options and preferences.......................................................................... 83
7.1 Configure the transmitter display........................................................................................... 83
7.2 Configure the transmitter response to alerts........................................................................88
Chapter 8
Integrate the meter with the control system..................................................................... 97
8.1 Channel configuration.............................................................................................................. 97
8.2 Configure I/O Channel A.......................................................................................................... 97
8.3 Configure I/O Channel B.......................................................................................................... 97
8.4 Configure an mA Output.......................................................................................................... 98
8.5 Configure a Frequency Output..............................................................................................106
8.6 Configure a Discrete Output..................................................................................................110
Chapter 9
Configure digital communications..................................................................................... 113
Chapter 10
Complete the configuration................................................................................................ 121
10.1 Test or tune the system using sensor simulation.............................................................121
10.2 Enable or disable write-protection......................................................................................122
Chapter 11
Transmitter operation..........................................................................................................125
11.1 View process and diagnostic variables...............................................................................125
11.2 View and acknowledge status alerts.................................................................................. 126
11.3 Read totalizer and inventory values................................................................................... 127
11.4 Start, stop, and reset totalizers and inventories............................................................... 127
Chapter 12
Operation using the batcher............................................................................................... 131
12.1 Run a batch............................................................................................................................ 131
12.2 Perform AOC calibration...................................................................................................... 134
Chapter 13
Measurement support..........................................................................................................137
13.1 Use Smart Meter Verification.............................................................................................. 137
13.2 Advanced Phase Measurement software.......................................................................... 145
13.3 Zero the meter.......................................................................................................................146
13.4 Set up pressure compensation........................................................................................... 148
13.5 Validate the meter................................................................................................................ 152
13.6 Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration........................................................154
13.7 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim Offset .....................................................156
13.8 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim Slope and Trim Offset ......................... 157
Chapter 14
Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 161
14.1 Install a new transmitter license......................................................................................... 161
14.2 Upgrade the transmitter firmware..................................................................................... 162
14.3 Reboot the transmitter.........................................................................................................163
14.4 Battery replacement............................................................................................................. 163
Chapter 15
Log files, history files, and service files..............................................................................165
15.1 Generate history files........................................................................................................... 165
15.2 Generate service files........................................................................................................... 170
Chapter 16
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 177
16.1 Status LED and device status...............................................................................................177
4
®
9.1 Configure HART communications....................................................................................... 113
9.2 Configure Modbus communications.................................................................................... 117
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Contents
May 2024
16.2 API Referral troubleshooting...............................................................................................177
16.3 Batch troubleshooting..........................................................................................................178
16.4 Concentration measurement troubleshooting................................................................. 179
16.5 Alert when connecting a core processor to a remote 1600 Transmitter....................... 180
16.6 Density measurement troubleshooting............................................................................181
16.7 Discrete Output troubleshooting........................................................................................183
16.8 Flow measurement troubleshooting..................................................................................184
16.9 Frequency Output troubleshooting....................................................................................186
16.10 mA Output troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 188
16.11 Status alerts, causes, and recommendations................................................................. 190
16.12 Check the cutoffs................................................................................................................ 206
16.13 Check the direction parameters........................................................................................206
16.14 Check the drive gain........................................................................................................... 207
16.15 Check for internal electrical problems............................................................................. 207
16.16 Check Frequency Output Fault Action .............................................................................208
16.17 Check the scaling of the Frequency Output.................................................................... 208
16.18 Check grounding.................................................................................................................208
16.19 Perform transmitter output tests..................................................................................... 209
16.20 Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value ...................................................... 212
16.21 Check mA Output Fault Action ......................................................................................... 212
16.22 Trim mA Output.................................................................................................................. 212
16.23 Check HART communications............................................................................................213
16.24 Check the pickoff voltage...................................................................................................213
16.25 Check power supply wiring................................................................................................214
16.26 Check for radio frequency interference (RFI).................................................................. 214
16.27 Checking process variables............................................................................................... 215
16.28 Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring..................................................................................218
16.29 Using sensor simulation for troubleshooting................................................................. 218
16.30 Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)............................................................................... 219
16.31 Check the sensor coils........................................................................................................ 219
Appendix A
Using the transmitter display............................................................................................. 221
A.1 Components of the transmitter display............................................................................... 221
A.2 Access and use the display menus....................................................................................... 222
Appendix B
Using ProLink III with the transmitter.............................................................................. 227
B.1 Basic information about ProLink III .....................................................................................227
B.2 Connect with ProLink III ........................................................................................................228
Appendix C
Using a field communicator with the transmitter........................................................... 229
C.1 Basic information about field communicators....................................................................229
C.2 Connect with a field communicator .....................................................................................229
Appendix D
Concentration measurement matrices..............................................................................231
D.1 Standard matrices for the Concentration Measurement application..............................231
D.2 Derived variables and calculated process variables.......................................................... 232
Appendix E
Environmental compliance.................................................................................................. 233
E.1 RoHS and WEEE....................................................................................................................... 233
Configuration and Use Manual
5
Contents
May 2024
6
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Before you begin
May 2024
1 Before you begin
1.1 About this manual
This manual helps you configure, commission, use, maintain, and troubleshoot a Micro Motion 1600
transmitter with configurable inputs and outputs.
Important
This manual assumes that:
• The transmitter has been installed correctly and completely according to the instructions in the transmitter
installation manual.
•
Users understand basic transmitter and sensor installation, configuration, and maintenance concepts and
procedures.
1.2 Hazard messages
This document uses the following criteria for hazard messages based on ANSI standards Z535.6-2011 (R2017).
DANGER
Serious injury or death will occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
WARNING
Serious injury or death could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
CAUTION
Minor or moderate injury will or could occur if a hazardous situation is not avoided.
NOTICE
Data loss, property damage, hardware damage, or software damage can occur if a situation is not avoided.
There is no credible risk of physical injury.
Physical access
WARNING
Unauthorized personnel can potentially cause significant damage and/or misconfiguration of end users'
equipment. Protect against all intentional or unintentional unauthorized use.
Physical security is an important part of any security program and fundamental to protecting your system.
Restrict physical access to protect users' assets. This is true for all systems used within the facility.
1.3 Cybersecurity
1.3.1 Defense-in-depth strategy
Security capabilities
The Micro Motion 1600 transmitter has several features that can help to protect it against either intentional or
unintentional access and configuration changes. For each input and output, the secure set up is described:
•
Configuration Audit Trail log stored by the system (refer to Generate history files)
Configuration and Use Manual
7
Before you begin
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Micro Motion 1600 signed firmware (refer to Upgrade the transmitter firmware)
•
Write protect physical lock switch (refer to Configure security for the display)
Mitigation strategies
Any device in the field is prone to a physical attack, which must be mitigated by physical security controls.
If a device can access the worldwide internet, then it can be discoverable by malicious actors. As a result,
field devices must be in a dedicated and actively-managed network. If an input or an output is described as
insecure, it means that it is unencrypted (available in clear text) and does not have access control capabilities
(for example there is no way to tell who is communicating with the transmitter).
The following are inputs and outputs of the device that can be utilized for the Micro Motion 1600 device.
Note
If a protocol is licensed, you must call support to have it disabled. If a protocol is not licensed, it is disabled.
(Refer to View the licensed features (optional)).
•
Local Operator Interface (LOI) – four-character passcode (refer to Configure security for the display)
•
USB service port – disable option (refer to Enable or disable the service port)
•
For the inputs and outputs available on this transmitter with different channels, refer to Rules for channel
combinations.
•
Both HART and RS-485 Modbus are inherently insecure protocols. As a result, Emerson recommends using
these protocols while the transmitter is within a physically secure environment, according to a company's
security policy.
The physical write protect switch controls all the interfaces. The physical write protect (dip) switch is located
behind the display. More information can be found in Security and write protection.
Security defense-in-depth measures
The device is not intended to be directly connected to an enterprise or to an internet-facing network without a
compensating control in place. Do not connect the device without mitigation measures in place.
1.3.2 Security hardening guidelines
Product integration
The device has optional applications for configuration and data viewing. When such applications are used,
they must run on devices that are configured according to the security policy of the company using the device.
Defense-in-depth strategy
This transmitter device has been developed using secure coding principals and procedures, including threat
modeling and security specific testing. It has several interfaces developed using the Secure Development
Lifecycle (SDL), according to IEC 62443-4-1, which is the recognized standard for the oil and gas, and
manufacturing industries.
Configuring the device
There are multiple ways to configure the Micro Motion 1600 device securely including:
Issue:
Local display allows the user a default passcode that is known publicly. Anyone in physical proximity
to the device could log into it.
Resolution:
Change the passcode upon the first use and do not share passcodes.
8
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Before you begin
May 2024
Issue:
The USB service port is enabled by default.
If a malicious actor has a physical access to the device, then they can install unauthorized software.
Resolution:
Emerson recommends disabling option when not needed and operating the device within a secure
physical environment (refer to Enable or disable the service port).
Defaults
This transmitter is equipped with a Universal Service Port that works with USB type C connections, including
compatible flash drives. There are multiple levels of security built into the transmitter service port that you can
configure according to your needs and security standards.
The service port offers the following features that enhance interface security:
•
The service port is inaccessible without physical access to the transmitter and requires removal of the
terminal cover.
•
The service port can be disabled from the transmitter through software (refer to Enable or disable the
service port).
•
The transmitter has a non-traditional operating system that is neither designed to execute programs nor to
run scripts.
•
The display can be passcode protected to limit access to the USB file menu.
•
Overall transmitter security switches such as the write protect (dip) switch disallows configuration changes
from all interfaces, including the Universal Service Port. More information can be found in Security and
write protection.
This transmitter is :
•
Designed to be implemented in an industrial automation control system (Level 1 of the Purdue Reference
Architecture Model), with defense-in-depth security controls.
•
Not intended to be directly connected to an enterprise or to an internet-facing network without a
compensating control in place.
1.3.3 Secure operation guidelines
Operation of product
Best practices of product operation:
•
Operate the device within a controlled and secured physical environment.
•
Operate the device within a controlled and secured network environment.
•
Manage all the accounts on the device according to the security policy of your company.
Reporting security vulnerabilities
Use Report a Vulnerability on Emerson.com for reporting vulnerabilities back to Emerson.
Best security practices
Best practices of product operation:
•
Do not connect the device to the worldwide net.
•
Apply security patches and updates as they are released. Maintain power to the device during the entire
firmware update.
•
Change the passcodes and passwords frequently (at least once a month).
•
When entering the local display passcode, ensure no one else can view the passcode.
Configuration and Use Manual
9
Before you begin
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Do not share passwords, passcodes, or other protected information.
•
Do not share the admin passcode.
1.3.4 Secure product disposal guidelines
Instructions for product removal
When the device needs to be disposed of, consider the following aspects of device removal:
•
Identify whether the device can be reused in another part of the process for either testing or training
purposes.
•
Identify what data is stored on the device and sanitize this data using your organization's security policy.
Consider restoring your factory configuration (see Restore the factory configuration).
— Verify that the local display passcode is set to the default “AAAA".
•
If the device is ready for disposal, then it can be discarded or physically destroyed using your organization’s
security policy.
1.4 Related documentation
You can find all product documentation on the product documentation DVD shipped with the product or at
Emerson.com.
See any of the following documents for more information:
•
Micro Motion 1600 Transmitters Product Data Sheet
•
Micro Motion 1600 Transmitters with Configurable Inputs and Outputs: Configuration and Use Manual
•
Replacing the Electronics Assembly Module for the 1600 Transmitter
•
Sensor installation manual
1.5 Communication methods
You can use several different communications methods to interface with the transmitter. You may use
different methods in different locations or for different tasks.
Interface
Tool
Display
Capacitive touch buttons
Universal Service Port
ProLink™ III
Modbus® over RS485 Port(1)
Field Communicator
HART®/Bell 202(2)
(1) Modbus over RS 485 port only compatible with units sold with hardware board code M.
(2) Field communicator only compatible with units sold with hardware board code A.
For information about how to use the communication tools, see the appendices in this manual.
10
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Quick start
May 2024
2 Quick start
2.1 Power up the transmitter
The transmitter must be powered up for all configuration and commissioning tasks, or for process
measurement.
Procedure
1. Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that a new device in the control system does not interfere with
existing measurement and control loops.
2. Verify that the cables are connected to the transmitter as described in the installation manual.
3. Verify that all transmitter and sensor covers and seals are closed.
WARNING
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, ensure that all covers and seals are
tightly closed. For hazardous area installations, applying power while housing covers are removed or
loose can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
4. Turn on the electrical power at the power supply.
Postrequisites
Although the sensor is ready to receive process fluid shortly after power-up, the electronics can take up
to 10 minutes to reach thermal equilibrium. Therefore, if this is the initial startup, or if power has been
off long enough to allow components to reach ambient temperature, allow the electronics to warm up for
approximately 10 minutes before relying on process measurements. During this warm-up period, you may
observe minor measurement instability or inaccuracy.
2.2 Check meter status
Check the meter for any error conditions that require user action or that affect measurement accuracy.
Procedure
1. Wait approximately 10 seconds for the power-up sequence to complete.
Immediately after power-up, the transmitter runs through diagnostic routines and checks for error
conditions. During the power-up sequence, the Transmitter Initializing alert is active. This alert
should clear automatically when the power-up sequence is complete.
2. Check the status LED.
Table 2-1: Status LED and device status
Status LED condition
Device status
Solid green
No alerts are active.
Solid yellow
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
Solid red
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Auto zero or SMV test in progress
Flashing green
An auto zero is being performed.
Configuration and Use Manual
11
Quick start
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 2-1: Status LED and device status (continued)
Status LED condition
Device status
Status LED off
Transmitter is not receiving power.
Display is not seated or not functioning properly.
2.3 Commissioning wizards
The transmitter menu includes a Guided Setup to help you move quickly through the most common
configuration parameters. ProLink III™ also provides a commissioning wizard.
By default, when the transmitter starts up, the Guided Setup menu is offered. You can choose to use it or not.
You can also choose whether or not Guided Setup is displayed automatically.
•
To enter Guided Setup:
— During transmitter setup, choose Yes at the prompt.
— After transmitter setup, Menu → Startup Tasks
•
To control the automatic display of Guided Setup, choose Menu → Configuration → Guided Setup.
For information on the ProLink III commissioning wizard, see the Micro Motion ProLink III with ProcessViz
Software User Manual.
As the commissioning wizards are self guided, they are not documented in detail.
2.4 Make a startup connection to the transmitter
For all configuration tools except the display, you must have an active connection to the transmitter to
configure the transmitter.
Procedure
Identify the connection type to use, and follow the instructions for that connection type in the appropriate
appendix.
Communications tool
Connection type to use
Instructions
ProLink III
Service port
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
Field communicator
HART
Using a field communicator with the
transmitter
™
2.5 Set the transmitter clock
Display
Menu → Configuration → Time/Date/Tag
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Clock
Field communicator
Device Settings → Setup Overview → Real Time Clock
The transmitter clock provides timestamp data for alerts, service logs, history logs, and all other timers and
dates in the system. You can set the clock for your local time or for any standard time you want to use.
Note
You may find it convenient to set all of your transmitter clocks to the same time, even if the transmitters are in
different time zones.
To aid in record keeping convenience, set transmitter clocks located in different time zones to the same time.
12
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Quick start
May 2024
Procedure
1. Select the time zone that you want to use.
2. If you need a custom time zone, select Special Time Zone and enter your time zone as a difference from
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
3. Set the time appropriately.
Note
The transmitter does not adjust for Daylight Savings Time. If you observe Daylight Savings Time, you
must reset the transmitter clock manually.
4. Set the month, day, and year.
The transmitter tracks the year and automatically adds a day for leap years.
2.6 View the licensed features (optional)
Display
Menu → About → Licenses → Licensed Features
ProLink III
Device Tools → Device Information → Licensed Features
Field communicator
Device Settings → Device Information → Licenses
You can view the licensed features to ensure that the transmitter was ordered with the required features.
The transmitter license controls the features that are enabled on the transmitter, including both software
applications and I/O channels.
Licensed features are purchased and available for permanent use. The options model code represents the
licensed features.
A trial license allows you to explore features before purchasing. The trial license enables the specified features
for a limited number of days. This number is displayed for reference. At the end of this period, the feature will
no longer be available.
To purchase additional features or request a trial license, either write down or record the Unique ID Number
and current license key from your transmitter and then contact customer service. To enable the additional
features or trial license, you will need to install the new license on the transmitter.
2.7 Set informational parameters
Display
Menu → Configuration → Device Information
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters
Field communicator
Device Settings → Device Information
You can set several parameters that identify or describe the transmitter and sensor. These parameters are not
used in processing and are not required.
Procedure
1. Set informational parameters for the transmitter.
a) Set Transmitter Serial Number to the serial number of your transmitter.
The transmitter serial number is provided on the metal tag that is attached to the transmitter
housing.
b) Set Descriptor to any desired description of this transmitter or measurement point.
Configuration and Use Manual
13
Quick start
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
c) Set Message to any desired message.
d) Verify that Model Code (Base) is set to the base model code of the transmitter.
The base model code completely describes your transmitter, except for the features that can be
licensed independently. The base model code is set at the factory.
e) Set Model Code (Options) to the options model code of the transmitter.
The options model code describes the independent features that have been licensed for this
transmitter. The original options model code is set at the factory. If you license additional options
for this transmitter, Emerson will supply an updated options model code.
For a field communicator, configuring model code options is not available for this release.
2. Set informational parameters for the sensor.
a) Set Sensor Serial Number to the serial number of the sensor connected to this transmitter.
The sensor serial number is provided on the metal tag that is attached to the sensor case.
b) Set Sensor Material to the material used for the sensor.
c) Set Flange Type to the type of flange that was used to install the sensor.
Sensor Type is set or derived during characterization.
2.8 Characterize the meter (if required)
Display
Menu → Configuration → Sensor Parameters
ProLink III
Device Tools → Calibration Data
Field communicator
Device Settings → Setup Overview → Sensor
Characterizing the meter adjusts the 1600 transmitter to match the unique traits of the sensor it is paired with.
The characterization parameters (also called calibration parameters) describe the sensor’s sensitivity to flow,
density, and temperature. Depending on your sensor type, different parameters are required.
Values for your sensor are provided on the sensor tag or the calibration certificate.
•
If your transmitter was ordered with a sensor, it was characterized at the factory. However, you should still
verify the characterization parameters.
•
Perform a characterization whenever you replace a core processor or the transmitter.
Note
If the transmitter and sensor are purchased together, you do not need to characterize the meter because this
step was performed at the factory prior to shipping.
Note
The Micro Motion 1600 Transmitter derives Sensor Type from the user-specified values for FCF and K1.
Procedure
1. Set the flow calibration factor: FCF (also called Flow Cal or Flow Calibration Factor). Be sure to include
both decimal points and all zeros.
2. Set the density characterization parameters: D1, D2, TC, K1, K2, and FD. (TC is sometimes shown as DT.)
3. Apply the changes as required by the tool you are using.
14
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Quick start
May 2024
The transmitter identifies your sensor type, and characterization parameters are adjusted as required:
•
If Sensor Type changed from Curved Tube to Straight Tube, five characterization parameters are
added to the list.
•
If Sensor Type changed from Straight Tube to Curved Tube, five characterization parameters are
removed from the list.
•
If Sensor Type did not change, the list of characterization parameters does not change.
4. T-Series sensors only: Set the additional characterization parameters listed below:
Characterization parameter type
Parameters
Flow
FTG, FFQ
Density
DTG, DFQ1, DFQ2
2.8.1 Sample sensor tags
Figure 2-1: Tag on newer curved-tube sensors (all sensors except T-Series)
2.8.2 Flow calibration parameters (FCF, FT)
Two separate values are used to describe flow calibration: a 6-character FCF value and a 4-character FT value.
They are provided on the sensor tag.
Both values contain decimal points. During characterization, these are entered as a single 10-character string.
The 10-character string is called either Flowcal or FCF.
If your sensor tag shows the FCF and the FT values separately and you need to enter a single value,
concatenate the two values to form the single parameter value, retaining both decimal points.
Concatenating FCF and FT
FCF = x.xxxx FT = y.yy Flow calibration parameter: x.xxxxy.yy
Configuration and Use Manual
15
Quick start
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2.8.3 Density calibration parameters (D1, D2, K1, K2, FD, DT, TC)
Density calibration parameters are typically on the sensor tag and the calibration certificate.
If your sensor tag does not show a D1 or D2 value:
•
For D1, enter the Dens A or D1 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density
of the low-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses air. If you cannot find a Dens A or D1 value, enter
0.001 g/cm3.
•
For D2, enter the Dens B or D2 value from the calibration certificate. This value is the line-condition density
of the high-density calibration fluid. Micro Motion uses water. If you cannot find a Dens B or D2 value,
enter 0.998 g/cm3 .
If your sensor tag does not show a K1 or K2 value:
•
For K1, enter the first five digits of the density calibration factor. In this sample tag, this value is shown as
12500.
•
For K2, enter the second five digits of the density calibration factor. In this sample tag, this value is shown
as 14286.
Figure 2-2: K1, K2, and TC values in the density calibration factor
If your sensor does not show an FD value, contact customer service.
If your sensor tag does not show a DT or TC value, enter the last four characters of the density calibration
factor. In the sample tag shown above, the value is shown as 4.44.
Do not confuse the Meter Factor line on the pictured sensor tag with any meter factor settings discussed in
this manual.
2.9 Verify mass flow measurement
Check to see that the mass flow rate reported by the transmitter is accurate. You can use any available
method.
Procedure
•
Read the value for Mass Flow Rate on the transmitter display.
•
Connect to the transmitter with ProLink III and read the value for Mass Flow Rate in the Process Variables
panel.
•
Connect to the transmitter with a field communicator and read the value for Mass Flow Rate.
16
Online → Overview → Mass Flow Rate
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Quick start
May 2024
Postrequisites
If the reported mass flow rate is not accurate:
•
Check the characterization parameters.
•
Review the troubleshooting suggestions for flow measurement issues.
For information about modifying these values, refer to Configure mass flow measurement.
2.10 Verify the zero
Display
Menu → Service Tools → Verification & Calibration → Meter Zero → Zero Verification
ProLink III
Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Verify Zero
Field communicator
Device Settings → Calibration → Zero Calibration → Perform Zero Verify
Verifying the zero helps you determine if the stored zero value is appropriate to your installation, or if a field
zero can improve measurement accuracy.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the meter unless one of the
following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
•
The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the
zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Procedure
1. Prepare the meter:
a) Allow the meter to warm up for at least 20 minutes after applying power.
b) Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal
process operating temperature.
c) Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if
available.
d) Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full
of process fluid.
2. Start the zero verification procedure, and wait until it completes.
3. If the zero verification procedure fails:
a) Confirm that the sensor is completely blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is
completely full of process fluid.
b) Verify that the process fluid is not flashing or condensing, and that it does not contain particles
that can settle out.
c) Repeat the zero verification procedure.
d) If it fails again, zero the meter.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Configuration and Use Manual
17
Quick start
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Related information
Zero the meter
18
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
3 Introduction to configuration and
commissioning
3.1 Security and write protection
The transmitter has several features that can help to protect it against intentional or unintentional access and
configuration changes.
•
When locked, the mechanical lock switch on the front of the upper puck prevents any configuration
changes to the transmitter from any local or remote configuration tool.
•
When enabled, the software setting Write Protection prevents any configuration changes. The setting can
only be enabled if the transmitter does not have a display.
•
If the Universal Service Port (USP) is disabled, the port cannot be used by any service tool to communicate
with or make changes to the transmitter.
•
When enabled, Security prevents any configuration changes being made from the display unless the
appropriate password is entered.
3.1.1 Enable or disable the service port
Display
Menu → Configuration → Security → Service Port
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Field communicator
Device Settings → Security → Enable/Disable Service Port
The service port is enabled by default. You can use the service port for connecting to ProLink III and for
transferring files. If you want to completely prevent it from being used, you can disable it.
Note
Enabling or disabling the service port will not take effect until power has been cycled to the transmitter.
WARNING
Do not use the service port if the transmitter is in a hazardous area because using the service port means
that you must open the transmitter wiring compartment. Opening the wiring compartment in a hazardous
area while the transmitter is powered up can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
3.1.2 Enable or disable write-protection
Upper puck
Use the mechanical switch on the upper puck.
ProLink III
Not available
Field communicator
Device Settings → Security → Security Switch Status → Write Protect
When enabled, Write-Protection prevents changes to the transmitter configuration. You can perform all other
functions, and you can view the transmitter configuration parameters.
Note
Write protection is available only by removing the display in order to access the upper puck component and
using the lock switch to set the switch ON.
Configuration and Use Manual
19
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Figure 3-1: Removing the transmitter housing cover
A. Display Component
B. Upper Puck Component
20
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
Figure 3-2: Setting Switch 1 ON (to the left) to Set Write-Protection
A. Switch 1
Write-protecting the transmitter primarily prevents accidental changes to configuration, not intentional
changes. Any user who can make changes to the configuration can disable write protection.
3.1.3 Configure security for the display
Display
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Security
When using the display, you can require users to enter a password to do any of the following tasks:
•
Enter the main menu
•
Change a parameter
•
Access alert data through the display
•
Start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories via the context menu
The display password can be the same or different from the totalizer/inventory context menu control
password. If different, the display password is used to reset, start, and stop totalizers or inventories using
Menu → Operations → Totalizers.
Configuration and Use Manual
21
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Procedure
1. Configure Password Required as desired.
Option
Description
At Write
When an user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are
prompted to enter the display password.
Enter Menu
When the menu is selected from the process variable screen, the display password
will be immediately required if Password Required is set.
Never (default) When a user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are
prompted to enter a specific button sequence ( ⇦⇧⇩⇨). This is designed to protect
against accidental changes to configuration. It is not a security measure.
2. If the At Write or Enter Menu option was selected, enable or disable alert security as desired.
Option
Description
Enabled
If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display but
the alert banner is not displayed. If the operator attempts to enter the alert menu, they are
prompted to enter the display password.
Disabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display
and the alert banner is displayed automatically. No password or confirmation is required to
enter the alert menu.
Restriction
You cannot set Password Required to Never and enable alert security.
•
If you did not enable Password Required, alert security is disabled and cannot be enabled.
•
Alert security is disabled automatically if you set Password Required to Never after:
— Password Required is initially set to either At Write or Enter Menu.
— Alert security is enabled.
3. If Password Required has been set to At Write or Enter Menu, you will be prompted to enter the desired
password.
•
Default: AAAA
•
Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
•
Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/inventory control
context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required but you do not change the display password, the transmitter will post
a configuration alert.
22
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
4. Configure Main Menu Available as desired.
Option
Description
Enabled
The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will be accessible.
Disabled
The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will not be accessible.
Important
Once Main Menu Available is disabled, it cannot be enabled from the local display. Use another
configuration tool, such as ProLink III, to re-enable main menu access from the local display.
3.2 Work with configuration files
You can save the current transmitter configuration in two forms: a backup file and a replication file.
Tip
You can use a saved configuration file to change the nature of the transmitter quickly. This might be
convenient if the transmitter is used for different applications or different process fluids.
Backup files
Contain all parameters. They are used to restore the current device if required.
The .spare extension is used to identify backup files.
Replication files
Contain all parameters except the device-specific parameters, e.g., calibration factors or
meter factors. They are used to replicate the transmitter configuration to other devices.
The .xfer extension is used to identify replication files.
3.2.1 Save a configuration file using the display
Procedure
•
To save the current configuration to the transmitter's internal memory:
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Save/Restore Config → Save Config to Memory.
b) When prompted to load 1600 device configuration data from a file, click the on my 1600 device
internal memory radio button.
c) Enter the name for this configuration file.
The configuration file is saved to internal memory as yourname.spare.
3.2.2 Save a configuration file using ProLink III
Note
When you use ProLink III format for configuration files, you can specify configuration parameters individually
or by groups. Therefore, you can use this format for both backup and replication.
Prerequisites
If you are planning to use the USP (Universal Service Port), the port must be enabled. It is enabled by default.
However, if you need to enable or disable it using the display, choose Menu → Configuration → Security and
set Service Port to On.
Procedure
•
To save the current configuration to your PC, in 1600 format:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Save Configuration.
Configuration and Use Manual
23
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
b) Select On my computer in 1600 device file format and click Next.
c) Select Save.
d) Browse to the desired location, then enter the name for this configuration file.
e) Set the file type.
— To save a backup file, set the file type to Backup.
— To save a replication file, set the file type to Transfer.
f) Select Save.
The configuration file is saved to the specified location as yourname.spare or yourname.xfer.
•
To save the current configuration to your PC, in ProLink III format:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Save Configuration.
b) Select On my computer in ProLink III file format and click Next.
c) Select Save.
d) Select the configuration parameters to be included in this file.
— To save a backup file, select all parameters.
— To save a replication file, select all parameters except device-specific parameters.
e) Select Save.
f) Browse to the desired location, then enter the name for this configuration file.
g) Set the file type to ProLink configuration file.
h) Select Start Save.
The configuration file is saved to the specified location as yourname.pcfg.
3.2.3 Load a configuration file using the display
Prerequisites
You must have a backup file or a replication file available for use in internal memory.
Procedure
•
To load a configuration file to the transmitter's internal memory:
a) Ensure the configuration file is in the Config folder.
b) Upload the configuration file through the USP file by specifying Device Tools → Configuration
Transfer → Load Configuration.
c) When prompted to load 1600 device configuration data from a file, click the on my 1600 device
internal memory radio button.
d) Choose Backup and click Restore.
The configuration file is loaded to internal memory as yourname.spare.
24
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
3.2.4 Load a configuration file using ProLink III
You can load a configuration file to a transmitter's internal memory, as well as loading a backup file or a
replication file. Two PC file formats are supported: the 1600 format and the ProLink III format.
Note
When you use ProLink III format for configuration files, you can specify configuration parameters individually
or by groups. Therefore, you can use this format for both backup and replication.
Procedure
•
To load a backup file or replication file in 1600 format from the PC:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Load Configuration.
b) Select On my computer in 1600 device file format and select Next.
c) Select Restore.
d) Set the file type.
— To load a backup file, set the file type to Backup.
— To load a replication file, set the file type to Transfer.
e) Navigate to the file you want to load, and select it.
The parameters are written to the internal memory, and the new settings become effectively immediately.
•
To load a file in ProLink III format from the PC:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Load Configuration.
b) Select On my computer in ProLink III file format and select Next.
c) Select the parameters that you want to load.
d) Select Load.
e) Set the file type to Configuration file.
f) Navigate to the file you want to load, and select it.
g) Select Start Load.
The parameters are written to the internal memory, and the new settings become effectively immediately.
3.2.5 Replicate a transmitter configuration
Replicating a transmitter configuration is a fast method to set up similar or identical measurement points.
Procedure
1. Configure a transmitter and verify its operation and performance.
2. Use any available method to save a replication file from that transmitter.
3. Use any available method to load the replication file to another transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
25
Introduction to configuration and commissioning
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4. At the replicated transmitter, set device-specific parameters and perform device-specific procedures:
a) Set the clock.
b) Set the tag, long tag, IP address, and related parameters.
c) Characterize the transmitter.
d) Perform zero validation and take any recommended actions.
e) Perform loop tests and take any recommended actions, including mA Output trim.
f) Use sensor simulation to verify transmitter response.
5. At the replicated transmitter, make any other configuration changes.
6. Follow your standard procedures to ensure that the replicated transmitter is performing as desired.
26
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
4 Configure process measurement
4.1 Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Flow Direction
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Sensor Direction
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Flow → Sensor Direction
Sensor Flow Direction Arrow is used to accommodate installations in which the Flow arrow on the sensor
does not match the majority of the process flow. This typically happens when the sensor is either accidentally
installed backwards or conditions require that it be installed backwards.
Sensor Flow Direction Arrow interacts with mA Output Direction, Frequency Output Direction, and Totalizer
Direction to control how flow is reported by the outputs and accumulated by the totalizers and inventories.
The Sensor Flow Direction Arrow also affects how flow is reported on the transmitter display and via digital
communications.
Figure 4-1: Flow arrow on sensor
A. Flow arrow
B. Actual flow direction
Procedure
Set Sensor Flow Direction Arrow as appropriate.
Option
Description
With Arrow
The majority of flow through the sensor matches the Flow arrow on the sensor. Actual
forward flow is processed as forward flow.
Against Arrow The majority of flow through the sensor is opposite to the Flow arrow on the sensor. Actual
forward flow is processed as reverse flow.
Tip
Micro Motion sensors are bidirectional. Measurement accuracy is not affected by actual flow direction or the
setting of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow. Sensor Flow Direction Arrow controls only whether actual flow is
processed as forward flow or reverse flow.
Configuration and Use Manual
27
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Related information
Configure mA Output Direction
Configure Frequency Output Direction
Configure Discrete Output Source
Configure totalizers and inventories
Effect of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow on digital communications
4.2 Configure mass flow measurement
The mass flow measurement parameters control how mass flow is measured and reported. The mass total
and mass inventory are derived from the mass flow data.
4.2.1 Configure Mass Flow Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Mass Flow Rate → Mass Flow Rate Unit
Mass Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the mass flow rate. The
default unit used for mass total and mass inventory is derived from this unit.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: g/sec (grams per second)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Mass Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Mass Flow Measurement Unit, plus one
user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Grams per second
gram/s
g/sec
g/s
Grams per minute
gram/min
g/min
g/min
Grams per hour
gram/h
g/hr
g/h
Kilograms per second
kg/s
kg/sec
kg/s
Kilograms per minute
kg/min
kg/min
kg/min
Kilograms per hour
kg/h
kg/hr
kg/h
Kilograms per day
kg/d
kg/day
kg/d
Metric tons per minute
MetTon/min
mTon/min
MetTon/min
Metric tons per hour
MetTon/h
mTon/hr
MetTon/h
Metric tons per day
MetTon/d
mTon/day
MetTon/d
Pounds per second
lb/s
lbs/sec
lb/s
Pounds per minute
lb/min
lbs/min
lb/min
28
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Label
Unit description
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Pounds per hour
lb/h
lbs/hr
lb/h
Pounds per day
lb/d
lbs/day
lb/d
Short tons (2000 pounds) per minute
STon/min
sTon/min
STon/min
Short tons (2000 pounds) per hour
STon/h
sTon/hr
STon/h
Short tons (2000 pounds) per day
STon/d
sTon/day
STon/d
Long tons (2240 pounds) per hour
LTon/h
lTon/hr
LTon/h
Long tons (2240 pounds) per day
LTon/d
lTon/day
LTon/d
Special unit
SPECIAL
Special
Special
Define a special measurement unit for mass flow
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Units
→ SPECIAL
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Unit → Special
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Special Units
Procedure
1. Specify Base Mass Unit.
Base Mass Unit is the existing mass unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor as follows:
a) x base units = y special units
b) Mass Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter Mass Flow Conversion Factor.
The original mass flow rate value is divided by this value.
5. Set Mass Flow Label to the name you want to use for the mass flow unit. Maximum of 8 characters.
6. Set Mass Total Label to the name you want to use for the mass total and mass inventory unit. Maximum
of 8 characters.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special
measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for mass flow
To measure mass flow in ounces per second (oz/sec):
1. Set Base Mass Unit to Pounds (lb).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3. Calculate Mass Flow Conversion Factor:
a. 1 lb/sec = 16 oz/sec
b. Mass Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 16 = 0.0625
Configuration and Use Manual
29
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4. Set Mass Flow Conversion Factor to 0.0625.
5. Set Mass Flow Label to oz/sec.
6. Set Mass Total Label to oz.
4.2.2 Configure Flow Damping
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Flow Damping
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Flow Rate Damping
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Flow → Flow Damping
Flow Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the measured mass flow rate. It affects
flow rate process variables that are based on the measured mass flow rate. This includes volume flow rate and
gas standard volume flow rate.
Flow Damping also affects specialized flow rate variables such as temperature-corrected volume flow rate (API
Referral) and net mass flow rate (concentration measurement).
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value
specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the
change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Flow Damping to the value you want to use.
•
Default: 0.64 seconds
•
Range: 0 seconds to 60 seconds
Note
If a number greater than 60 is entered, it is automatically changed to 60.
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes
slowly.
•
A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes
more quickly.
•
The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in flow rate can result in increased
measurement error.
•
Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the reported measurement will lag the actual measurement
because the reported value is being averaged over time.
•
In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time
between the actual measurement and the reported value.
•
The transmitter automatically rounds off any entered damping value to the nearest valid value. Therefore,
the recommended damping value for gas applications should be 3.2 seconds. If you enter 2.56, the
transmitter will round it off to 3.2.
•
For filling applications, Emerson recommends using the default value of 0.04 seconds.
•
For gas applications, the damping should be set initially to 3.2 seconds. For most liquid applications, the
default setting of 0.64 seconds should suffice.
30
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Effect of flow damping on volume measurement
Flow damping affects volume measurement for liquid volume data. Flow damping also affects volume
measurement for gas standard volume data. The transmitter calculates volume data from the damped mass
flow data.
Interaction between Flow Damping and mA Output Damping
In some circumstances, both Flow Damping and mA Output Damping are applied to the reported mass flow
value.
Flow Damping controls the rate of change in flow process variables. mA Output Damping controls the rate of
change reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, and both Flow
Damping and mA Output Damping are set to non-zero values, flow damping is applied first, and the added
damping calculation is applied to the result of the first calculation.
4.2.3 Configure Mass Flow Cutoff
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Low
Flow Cutoff
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Cutoff
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Mass Flow Rate → Mass Flow Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest mass flow rate that will be reported as measured. All mass flow rates
below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Mass Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
•
Default: A sensor-specific value set at the factory. If your transmitter was ordered without a sensor, the
default may be 0.0.
•
Recommendation: 0.5% of maximum flow rate of the attached sensor. See the sensor specifications.
Important
Do not use your meter for measurement with Mass Flow Cutoff set to 0.0 g/sec. Ensure that Mass Flow Cutoff
is set to a nonzero value that is appropriate for your sensor and process conditions.
Effect of Mass Flow Cutoff on volume measurement
Mass Flow Cutoff does not affect volume measurement. Volume data is calculated from the actual mass data
rather than the reported value.
Volume flow has a separate Volume Flow Cutoff that is not affected by the Mass Flow Cutoff value.
Interaction between Mass Flow Cutoff and mA Output Cutoff
Mass Flow Cutoff defines the lowest mass flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process
Variable is set to Mass Flow Rate, the mass flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the higher
of the two cutoff values.
Mass Flow Cutoff affects all reported values and values used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events
defined on mass flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only mass flow values reported through mA Output.
Configuration and Use Manual
31
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable: Mass Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Mass Flow Rate
•
mA Output Cutoff: 10 g/sec
•
Mass Flow Cutoff: 15 g/sec
Result: If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec, mass flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all
internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Mass Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable: Mass Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Mass Flow Rate
•
mA Output Cutoff: 15 g/sec
•
Mass Flow Cutoff: 10 g/sec
Result:
•
If the mass flow rate drops below 15 g/sec but not below 10 g/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal
processing.
•
If the mass flow rate drops below 10 g/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all
internal processing.
4.3 Configure volume flow measurement for liquid
applications
The volume flow measurement parameters control how liquid volume flow is measured and reported. The
volume total and volume inventory are derived from volume flow data.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or
the other.
4.3.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for liquid applications
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Flow Type → Liquid
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Type → Liquid
Volume
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Volume Flow Rate
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with the following applications:
•
32
API Referral
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
•
Concentration measurement
•
Advanced Phase Measurement — liquid with gas
For these applications, set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
4.3.2 Configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Volume Flow Rate → Volume Flow Rate Unit
Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measurement that will be displayed for the volume flow
rate. The unit used for the volume total and volume inventory is based on this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Volume Flow Measurement Unit, ensure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: l/sec (liters per second)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit.
Options for Volume Flow Measurement Unit for liquid applications
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Volume Flow Measurement Unit, plus one
user-defined measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Cubic feet per second
ft3/s
ft3/sec
Cuft/s
Cubic feet per minute
ft3/min
ft3/min
Cuft/min
Cubic feet per hour
ft3/h
ft3/hr
Cuft/h
Cubic feet per day
ft3/d
ft3/day
Cuft/d
Cubic meters per second
m3/s
m3/sec
Cum/s
Cubic meters per minute
m3/min
m3/min
Cum/min
Cubic meters per hour
m3/h
m3/hr
Cum/h
Cubic meters per day
m3/d
m3/day
Cum/d
U.S. gallons per second
gal/s
US gal/sec
gal/s
U.S. gallons per minute
gal/m
US gal/min
gal/min
U.S. gallons per hour
gal/h
US gal/hr
gal/h
U.S. gallons per day
gal/d
US gal/day
gal/d
Configuration and Use Manual
33
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Label
Unit description
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Million U.S. gallons per day
MMgal/d
mil US gal/day
MMgal/d
Liters per second
L/s
l/sec
L/s
Liters per minute
L/min
l/min
L/in
Liters per hour
L/h
l/hr
L/h
Million liters per day
MML/d
mil l/day
ML/d
Imperial gallons per second
Impgal/s
Imp gal/sec
Impgal/s
Imperial gallons per minute
Impgal/m
Imp gal/min
Impgal/min
Imperial gallons per hour
Impgal/h
Imp gal/hr
Impgal/h
Imperial gallons per day
Impgal/d
Imp gal/day
Impgal/d
Barrels per second(1)
bbl/s
barrels/sec
bbl/s
Barrels per minute (1)
bbl/min
barrels/min
bbl/min
Barrels per hour(1)
bbl/h
barrels/hr
bbl/h
Barrels per day (1)
bbl/d
barrels/day
bbl/d
Beer barrels per second(2)
Beer bbl/s
Beer barrels/sec
Beer bbl/s
Beer barrels per minute(2)
Beer bbl/min
Beer barrels/min
Beer bbl/min
Beer barrels per hour (2)
Beer bbl/h
Beer barrels/hr
Beer bbl/h
Beer barrels per day (2)
Beer bbl/d
Beer barrels/day
Beer bbl/d
Special unit
SPECIAL
Special
Special
(1) Unit based on oil barrels (42 U.S. gallons).
(2) Unit based on U.S. beer barrels (31 U.S. gallons).
Define a special measurement unit for volume flow
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Units → SPECIAL
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Unit →
Special
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Special Units
Procedure
1. Specify Base Volume Unit.
Base Volume Unit is the existing volume unit that the special unit will be based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows:
a) x base units = y special units
b) Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter Volume Flow Conversion Factor.
34
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
The original volume flow rate value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the volume flow unit. Maximum of 8 characters.
6. Set Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the volume total and volume inventory unit.
Maximum of 8 characters.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special
measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for volume flow
To measure volume flow in pints per second (pints/sec):
1. Set Base Volume Unit to Gallons (gal).
2. Set Base Time Unit to Seconds (sec).
3. Calculate the conversion factor:
a. 1 gal/sec = 8 pints/sec
b. Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 8 = 0.1250
4. Set Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.1250.
5. Set Volume Flow Label to pints/sec.
6. Set Volume Total Label to pints.
4.3.3 Configure Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Low
Flow Cutoff
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Cutoff
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Volume Flow Rate → Volume Flow Rate Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest volume flow rate that will be reported as measured. All volume flow
rates below this cutoff are reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
•
Default: 0.01/sec (liters per second)
•
Range: 0 l/sec to x l/sec, where x is the sensor’s flow calibration factor, multiplied by 0.0002
•
Recommendation: 0.5% of the sensor's maximum rated volumetric flow rate based on water.
Interaction between Volume Flow Cutoff and mAO Cutoff
Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest liquid volume flow value that the transmitter will report as measured.
mAO Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output. If mA Output Process
Variable is set to Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported through mA Output is controlled by the
higher of the two cutoff values.
Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the volume flow values reported via the outputs and the volume flow values
used in other transmitter behavior (e.g., events defined on the volume flow).
mAO Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Configuration and Use Manual
35
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff lower than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable: Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Volume Flow Rate
•
AO Cutoff: 10 l/sec
•
Volume Flow Cutoff: 15 l/sec
Result: If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec, volume flow will be reported as 0, and 0 will be used in all
internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mAO Cutoff higher than Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable: Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Volume Flow Rate
•
AO Cutoff: 15 l/sec
•
Volume Flow Cutoff: 10 l/sec
Result:
•
If the volume flow rate drops below 15 l/sec but not below 10 l/sec:
— The mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal
processing.
•
If the volume flow rate drops below 10 l/sec, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will be used in all
internal processing.
4.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume (GSV) flow
measurement
The gas standard volume (GSV) flow measurement parameters control how gas standard volume flow is
measured and reported.
Restriction
You cannot implement both liquid volume flow and gas standard volume flow at the same time. Choose one or
the other.
4.4.1 Configure Volume Flow Type for gas applications
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Flow
Type → Gas
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Type → Gas Standard
Volume
Field
communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Gas Standard Volume
Volume Flow Type controls whether liquid or gas standard volume flow measurement will be used.
Restriction
Gas standard volume measurement is incompatible with the following applications:
36
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
API Referral
•
Concentration measurement
•
Advanced Phase Measurement — liquid with gas
Configure process measurement
May 2024
For these applications, set Volume Flow Type to Liquid.
Procedure
Set Volume Flow Type to Gas.
4.4.2 Configure Standard Gas Density
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Standard Gas Density
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Standard Density of Gas
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Gas Standard Volume
Standard Gas Density is the density of your gas at reference temperature and reference pressure. This is often
called standard density or base density. It is used to calculate the GSV flow rate from the mass flow rate.
Procedure
Set Standard Gas Density to the density of your gas at reference temperature and reference pressure.
You can use any reference temperature and reference pressure that you choose. It is not necessary to
configure these values in the transmitter.
Tip
ProLink III provides a guided method that you can use to calculate the standard density of your gas if you do
not know it.
4.4.3 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Gas Standard Volume
Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit specifies the unit of measure that will be used for the gas
standard volume (GSV) flow rate. The unit used for gas standard volume total and gas standard volume
inventory is derived from this unit.
Prerequisites
Before you configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit, be sure that Volume Flow Type is set to
Gas Standard Volume.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit to the unit you want to use.
Default: SCFM (Standard Cubic Feet per Minute)
Tip
If the measurement unit you want to use is not available, you can define a special measurement unit. Navigate
using the Display Device → Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow and click the Gas Wizard
button.
Configuration and Use Manual
37
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Options for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Gas Standard Volume Flow Measurement
Unit, plus one user-defined special measurement unit. Different communications tools may use different
labels for the units.
Label
Unit description
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Normal cubic meters per second
NCMS
Nm3/sec
Nm3/sec
Normal cubic meters per minute
NCMM
Nm3/min
Nm3/min
Normal cubic meters per hour
NCMH
Nm3/hr
Nm3/hr
Normal cubic meters per day
NCMD
Nm3/day
Nm3/day
Normal liter per second
NLPS
NLPS
NLPS
Normal liter per minute
NLPM
NLPM
NLPM
Normal liter per hour
NLPH
NLPH
NLPH
Normal liter per day
NLPD
NLPD
NLPD
Standard cubic feet per second
SCFS
SCFS
SCFS
Standard cubic feet per minute
SCFM
SCFM
SCFM
Standard cubic feet per hour
SCFH
SCFH
SCFH
Standard cubic feet per day
SCFD
SCFD
SCFD
Standard cubic meters per second
SCMS
Sm3/sec
Sm3/sec
Standard cubic meters per minute
SCMM
Sm3/min
Sm3/min
Standard cubic meters per hour
SCMH
Sm3/hr
Sm3/hr
Standard cubic meters per day
SCMD
Sm3/day
Sm3/day
Standard liter per second
SLPS
SLPS
SLPS
Standard liter per minute
SLPM
SLPM
SLPM
Standard liter per hour
SLPH
SLPH
SLPH
Standard liter per day
SLPD
SLPD
SLPD
Special measurement unit
SPECIAL
Special
Special
Define a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Units → SPECIAL
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow Unit
→ Special
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Gas Standard Volume
38
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
A special measurement unit is a user-defined unit of measure that allows you to report process data, totalizer
data, and inventory data in a unit that is not available in the transmitter. A special measurement unit is
calculated from an existing measurement unit using a conversion factor.
Procedure
1. Specify Base Gas Standard Volume Unit.
Base Gas Standard Volume Unit is the existing gas standard volume unit that the special unit will be
based on.
2. Specify Base Time Unit.
Base Time Unit is the existing time unit that the special unit will be based on.
3. Calculate Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor as follows:
a) x base units = y special units
b) Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = x ÷ y
4. Enter the Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor.
The original gas standard volume flow value is divided by this conversion factor.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume flow
unit.
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to the name you want to use for the gas standard volume total
and gas standard volume inventory unit.
The special measurement unit is stored in the transmitter. You can configure the transmitter to use the special
measurement unit at any time.
Example: Defining a special measurement unit for gas standard volume flow
You want to measure gas standard volume flow in thousands of standard cubic feet per minute.
1. Set Base Gas Standard Volume Unit to SCFM.
2. Set Base Time Unit to minutes (min).
3. Calculate the conversion factor:
a. One thousands of standard cubic feet per minute = 1000 cubic feet per minute
b. Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor = 1 ÷ 1000 = 0.001
4. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Conversion Factor to 0.001.
5. Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Label to KSCFM.
6. Set Gas Standard Volume Total Label to KSCF.
4.4.4 Configure Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings → Low
Flow Cutoff
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Gas Standard Volume Flow
Cutoff
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Gas Standard Volume
Configuration and Use Manual
39
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff specifies the lowest gas standard volume flow rate that will reported as
measured. All gas standard volume flow rates below this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff to the value you want to use.
•
Default: 0.0
•
Range: 0.0 to any positive value
Interaction between Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff and mA Output Cutoff
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff defines the lowest Gas Standard Volume flow value that the transmitter will
report as measured.
mA Output Cutoff defines the lowest flow rate that will be reported through mA Output.
If mA Output Process Variable is set to Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate, the volume flow rate reported
through mA Output is controlled by the higher of the two cutoff values.
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff affects both the gas standard volume flow values reported through outputs
and the gas standard volume flow values used in other transmitter behavior (for example, events defined on
gas standard volume flow).
mA Output Cutoff affects only flow values reported through mA Output.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff lower than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 10 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
•
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff: 15 SLPM
Result: If the Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate drops below 15 SLPM, the volume flow will be reported as 0, and
0 will be used in all internal processing.
Example: Cutoff interaction with mA Output Cutoff higher than Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff
Configuration:
•
mA Output Process Variable for the primary mA Output: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
Frequency Output Process Variable: Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
•
mA Output Cutoff for the primary mA Output: 15 SLPM (standard liters per minute)
•
Gas Standard Volume Flow Cutoff: 10 SLPM
Result:
•
If the Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate drops below 15 SLPM but not below 10 SLPM:
— The primary mA Output will report zero flow.
— The Frequency Output will report the actual flow rate, and the actual flow rate will be used in all internal
processing.
•
40
If the Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate drops below 10 SLPM, both outputs will report zero flow, and 0 will
be used in all internal processing.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
4.5 Configure density measurement
The density measurement parameters control how density is measured and reported. Density measurement is
used with mass flow rate measurement to determine liquid volume flow rate.
4.5.1 Configure Density Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Density → Density Unit
Density Measurement Unit controls the measurement units that will be used in density calculations and
reporting.
Restriction
If the API Referral application is enabled, you cannot change the density measurement unit here. The density
measurement unit is controlled by the API table selection.
Procedure
Set Density Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
Default: g/cm3 (grams per cubic centimeter)
Options for Density Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Density Measurement Unit. Different
communications tools may use different labels.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Specific gravity(1)
SGU
SGU
SGU
Grams per cubic centimeter
g/cm3
g/cm3
g/Cucm
Grams per liter
g/L
g/l
g/L
Grams per milliliter
g/mL
g/ml
g/mL
Kilograms per liter
kg/L
kg/l
kg/L
Kilograms per cubic meter
kg/m3
kg/m3
kg/Cum
Pounds per U.S. gallon
lb/gal
lbs/USgal
lb/gal
Pounds per cubic foot
lb/ft3
lbs/ft3
lb/Cuft
Pounds per cubic inch
lb/in3
lbs/in3
lb/CuIn
Degrees API(2)
API
API
degAPI
Short ton per cubic yard
STon/yd3
sT/yd3
STon/Cuyd
(1) Non-standard calculation. This value represents line density divided by the density of water at 60 °F
(15.6 °C).
(2) Non standard calculation, unless the API referral application is enabled. Calculated from line density instead
of specific gravity.
Configuration and Use Manual
41
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4.5.2 Configure Density Damping
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Damping
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Damping
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Density → Density Damping
Density Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to density data.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value
specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the
change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Density Damping to the desired value.
•
Default: 1.28 seconds
•
Range: 0.0 to 60 seconds
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes
slowly.
•
A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes
more quickly.
•
The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in density can result in increased
measurement error.
•
Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the
damped value is being averaged over time.
•
In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time
between the actual measurement and the damped value.
•
If a number greater than 60 is entered, it is automatically changed to 60.
Effect of Density Damping on volume measurement
Density Damping affects liquid volume measurement. Liquid volume values are calculated from the damped
density value rather than the measured density value. Density Damping does not affect gas standard volume
measurement.
Interaction between Density Damping and mA Output Damping
When mA Output is configured to report density, both Density Damping and mA Output Damping are applied
to the reported density value.
Density Damping controls the rate of change in the value of the process variable in transmitter memory.
mA Output Damping controls the rate of change reported through mA Output.
If mA Output Source is set to Density, and both Density Damping and mA Output Damping are set to
non-zero values, density damping is applied first, and the mA Output damping calculation is applied to the
result of the first calculation. This value is reported over mA Output.
4.5.3 Configure Density Cutoff
Display
42
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Cutoff
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Cutoff
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Density → Density Cutoff
Density Cutoff specifies the lowest density value that will be reported as measured. All density values below
this cutoff will be reported as 0.
Procedure
Set Density Cutoff to the value you want to use.
•
Default: 0.2 g/cm3
•
Range: 0.0 g/cm3 to 0.5 g/cm3
Effect of Density Cutoff on volume measurement
Density Cutoff affects liquid volume measurement. If the density value goes below Density Cutoff, the volume
flow rate is reported as 0.
4.6 Configure temperature measurement
The temperature measurement parameters control how temperature data is processed. Temperature data
is used in several different ways, including temperature compensation, API Referral, and concentration
measurement.
4.6.1 Configure Temperature Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Temperature → Temperature Unit
Temperature Measurement Unit specifies the unit that will be used for temperature measurement.
Procedure
Set Temperature Measurement Unit to the option you want to use.
Default: °C (Celsius)
Options for Temperature Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of units for Temperature Measurement Unit. Different
communications tools may use different labels for the units.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Degrees Celsius
°C
°C
degC
Degrees Fahrenheit
°F
°F
degF
Degrees Rankine
°R
°R
degR
Kelvin
°K
°K
Kelvin
Configuration and Use Manual
43
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4.6.2 Configure Temperature Damping
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Damping
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Temperature → Temperature Damping
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Temperature → Temperature Unit
Temperature Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to temperature data from the
sensor. Temperature Damping is not applied to external temperature data.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value
specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the internal value of the process variable (the damped value) will reflect 63% of the
change in the actual measured value.
Procedure
Set Temperature Damping to the desired value.
•
Default: 4.8 seconds
•
Range: 0.0 to 80 seconds
Note
If a number greater than 80 is entered, it is automatically changed to 80.
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes
slowly.
•
A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes
more quickly.
•
The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in temperature can result in increased
measurement error.
•
Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the
damped value is being averaged over time.
•
In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time
between the actual measurement and the damped value.
Effect of Temperature Damping on process measurement
Temperature Damping affects all processes and algorithms that use temperature data from the internal
sensor RTD.
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the effect of temperature on the
sensor tubes.
API Referral
Temperature Damping affects API Referral process variables only if the transmitter is configured to use
temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for API Referral, Temperature
Damping does not affect API Referral process variables.
Concentration measurement
Temperature Damping affects concentration measurement process variables only if the transmitter is
configured to use temperature data from the sensor. If an external temperature value is used for
44
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement
May 2024
concentration measurement, Temperature Damping does not affect concentration measurement process
variables.
4.7 Configure Pressure Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure → Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure Compensation → Pressure
Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → External Pressure/Temperature
Pressure Measurement Unit controls the measurement unit used for pressure. This unit must match the unit
used by the external pressure device.
Pressure data is used for pressure compensation and for API Referral. The device does not measure pressure
directly. You must set up a pressure input.
Procedure
Set Pressure Measurement Unit to the desired unit.
Default: psi
4.7.1 Options for Pressure Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Pressure Measurement Unit. Different
communications tools may use different labels for the units. In most applications, set Pressure Measurement
Unit to match the pressure measurement unit used by the remote device.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Feet water @ 68 °F
ftH2O @68°F
Ft Water @ 68°F
ftH₂O
Inches water @ 4 °C
inH2O @4°C
In Water @ 4°C
inH₂O @4DegC
Inches water @ 60 °F
inH2O @60°F
In Water @ 60°F
inH₂O @60DegF
Inches water @ 68 °F
inH2O @68°F
In Water @ 68°F
inH₂O
Millimeters water @ 4 °C
mmH2O @4°C
mm Water @ 4°C
mmH₂O @4DegC
Millimeters water @ 68 °F
mmH2O @68°F
mm Water @ 68°F
mmH₂O
Millimeters mercury @ 0 °C
mmHg @0°C
mm Mercury @ 0°C
mmHg
Inches mercury @ 0 °C
inHg @0°C
In Mercury @ 0°C
inHg
Pounds per square inch
psi
PSI
psi
Bar
bar
bar
bar
Millibar
mbar
millibar
mbar
Grams per square centimeter
g/cm2
g/cm2
g/Sqcm
Kilograms per square centimeter
kg/cm2
kg/cm2
kg/Sqcm
Pascals
Pa
pascals
Pa
Kilopascals
kPA
Kilopascals
kPa
Megapascals
mPA
Megapascals
MPa
Torr @ 0 °C
torr
Torr @ 0°C
torr
Configuration and Use Manual
45
Configure process measurement
May 2024
Unit description
Atmospheres
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
atm
atms
atm
4.8 Configure Velocity Measurement Unit
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Velocity → Units
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Velocity → Unit
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Velocity → Velocity Unit
Velocity Measurement Unit controls the measurement unit used to report velocity.
Procedure
Set Velocity Measurement Unit to the desired unit.
Default: m/sec
4.8.1 Options for Velocity Measurement Unit
The transmitter provides a standard set of measurement units for Velocity Measurement Unit. Different
communications tools may use different labels.
Unit description
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Feet per minute
ft/min
ft/min
ft/min
Feet per second
ft/s
ft/sec
ft/s
Inches per minute
in/min
in/min
in/min
Inches per second
in/s
in/sec
in/s
Meters per hour
m/h
m/hr
m/h
Meters per second
m/s
m/sec
m/s
46
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
5 Configure process measurement
applications
5.1 Set up the API Referral application
The API Referral application corrects line density to reference temperature and reference pressure according
to American Petroleum Institute (API) standards. The resulting process variable is referred density.
Restriction
The API Referral application is not compatible with the following applications:
•
Gas Standard Volume Measurement (GSV)
•
Advanced Phase Measurement
•
Concentration measurement
5.1.1 Set up the API Referral application using the display
Enable the API Referral application using the display
The API Referral application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the API Referral application
was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement.
2. Choose Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings and ensure that Flow Type is set to Liquid.
3. Return to the Process Measurement menu.
4. If the concentration measurement application is displayed in the list, choose Concentration
Measurement and ensure that Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled
simultaneously.
5. Enable API Referral.
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral.
b) Set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled.
Configure API Referral using the display
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in
referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process
fluid.
Configuration and Use Manual
47
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configure → Process Measurement → API Referral.
2. Set API Table to the API table that you want to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations. Choose your API table based on your
process fluid and the measurement unit that you want to use for referred density.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line
pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
•
230.0 x 10-6 to 930.0 x 10-6 per °F
•
414.0 x 10-6 to 1674.0 x 10-6 per °C
5. If required, set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in
referred density calculations.
The default reference temperature is determined by the selected API table.
6. If required, set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density
calculations.
The default reference pressure is determined by the selected API table.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using the display
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must
decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value
may produce inaccurate process data.
Prerequisites
If you plan to poll an external device, the primary mA Output (Channel A) must be wired to support HART®
communications.
The pressure measurement must be gauge pressure, not atmospheric pressure.
The pressure device must use the pressure unit that is configured in the transmitter.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the
transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
48
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Method
Description
Internal
temperature
Temperature data
from the on-board
temperature sensor
(RTD) will be used
for all measurements
and calculations. No
external temperature
data will be available.
Polling
The meter polls an
external device for
temperature data. This
data will be available in
addition to the internal
temperature data.
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Setup
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to Off.
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to On.
c. Choose Poll External Device.
d. Select Polled Variable 1 or Polled Variable 2.
e. Set Variable to External Temperature.
f. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART® masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not a HART
master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the network. A
field communicator is not a HART master.
g. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external temperature
device.
Digital
communications
A host writes
temperature data to the
meter at appropriate
intervals. This data
will be available in
addition to the internal
temperature data.
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to On.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup
to write temperature data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
2. Choose the method to be used to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Configuration and Use Manual
49
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Method
Description
Polling
The meter polls an
external device for
pressure data.
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Setup
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure →
External Pressure.
b. Set External Pressure to On.
c. Choose Poll External Device.
d. Select Polled Variable 1 or Polled Variable 2.
e. Set Variable to External Pressure.
f. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART® masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not a HART
master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the network. A
field communicator is not a HART master.
g. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external pressure device.
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure
data to the meter at
appropriate intervals.
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure →
External Pressure.
b. Set External Pressure to On.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and communications setup
to write pressure data to the transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the values for External
Temperature and External Pressure.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART® tag of the external device.
5.1.2 Set up the API Referral application using ProLink III
Enable the API Referral application using ProLink III
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed and enabled on your transmitter before you can perform any
setup. If the API Referral application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow and ensure that Volume Flow
Type is set to Liquid Volume.
50
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Options.
3. If the concentration measurement application is enabled, disable it and select Apply.
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled
simultaneously.
4. Enable API Referral and select Apply.
Configure API Referral using ProLink III
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in
referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process
fluid.
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral.
2. Specify the API table to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations.
a) Set Process Fluid to the API table group that your process fluid belongs to.
API table group
Process fluids
A tables
Generalized crude and JP4
B tables
Generalized products: Gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils, fuel oils,
diesel, gas oil
C tables
Liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient (TEC).
You will be required to enter the TEC for your process fluid.
D tables
Lubricating oils
E tables
NGL (Natural Gas Liquids) and LPG (Liquid Petroleum Gas)
b) Set Referred Density Measurement Unit to the measurement units that you want to use for
referred density.
c) Select Apply.
These parameters uniquely identify the API table to be used to calculate referred density. The selected
API table is displayed, and the meter automatically changes the density unit, temperature unit, pressure
unit, and reference pressure to match the API table.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
Restriction
Not all combinations are supported by the API Referral application. See the list of API tables in this
manual.
3. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line
pressure.
Configuration and Use Manual
51
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
•
230.0 x 10-6 to 930.0 x 10-6 per °F
•
414.0 x 10-6 to 1674.0 x 10-6 per °C
5. Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in referred density
calculations. If you choose Other, select the temperature measurement unit and enter the reference
temperature.
6. Set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density
calculations.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using ProLink III
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must
decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value
may produce inaccurate process data.
Prerequisites
If you plan to poll an external device, the primary mA Output (Channel A) must be wired to support HART®
communications.
The pressure measurement must be gauge pressure, not atmospheric pressure.
The pressure device must use the pressure unit that is configured in the transmitter.
If you are using an external temperature device, it must use the temperature unit that is configured in the
transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → API Referral.
2. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Description
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for temperature data.
This data will be available in
addition to the internal RTD
temperature data.
Setup
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART® masters will be on
the network. A field communicator is
not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature
device.
e. Select Apply.
52
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Option
Description
Digital
communications
A host writes temperature data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals. This data will be
available in addition to the
internal RTD temperature data.
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Setup
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Select Apply.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write temperature data to the
meter at appropriate intervals.
3. Choose the method you will use to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Description
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for pressure data.
Setup
a. Set Pressure Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature
device.
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals.
a. Set Pressure Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write pressure data to the meter
at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs
group on the ProLink III main window.
The current pressure value is displayed in the External Pressure field. Verify that the value is correct.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART® tag of the external device.
Configuration and Use Manual
53
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
5.1.3 Set up the API Referral application using a field communicator
Enable the API Referral application using a field communicator
Prerequisites
The API Referral application must be licensed and enabled on your transmitter. If the API Referral application
was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Volume Flow Type must be set to Liquid.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Settings → Device Information → Licenses → Enable/Disable Applications → Volume
Flow Type and ensure that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid.
This parameter is available only if API Referral or concentration measurement is not enabled. If you do
not see this parameter, it is already set correctly.
2. If the concentration measurement application is enabled, disable it.
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled
simultaneously.
3. Enable the API Referral application.
4. If Device Settings → Device Information → Licenses → Enable/Disable Applications → Advanced Phase
Measurement → Output Type is other than Disabled, disable it.
The Advance Phase Measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled
simultaneously.
Configure API Referral using a field communicator
The API Referral parameters specify the API table, measurement units, and reference values to be used in
referred density calculations.
Prerequisites
You will need API documentation for the API table that you select.
Depending on your API table, you may need to know the thermal expansion coefficient (TEC) for your process
fluid.
You must know the reference temperature and reference pressure that you want to use.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → API Referral.
2. Choose API Referral Setup.
3. Specify the API table that you want to use to calculate referred density.
Each API table is associated with a specific set of equations.
a) Set API Table Number to the number that matches the API table units that you want to use for
referred density.
Your choice also determines the measurement unit to be used for temperature and pressure,
and the default values for reference temperature and reference pressure.
API table number
Measurement
unit for referred
density
Temperature
measurement
unit
Pressure
measurement
unit
Default reference Default reference
temperature
pressure
5
°API
°F
psi (g)
60 °F
54
0 psi (g)
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
API table number
Measurement
unit for referred
density
Temperature
measurement
unit
Pressure
measurement
unit
Default reference Default reference
temperature
pressure
6(1)
°API
°F
psi (g)
60 °F
0 psi (g)
23
SGU
°F
psi (g)
60 °F
0 psi (g)
24(1)
SGU
°F
psi (g)
60 °F
0 psi (g)
53
kg/m³
°C
kPa (g)
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
54(1)
kg/m³
°C
kPa (g)
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
59(2)
kg/m³
°C
kPa (g)
20 °C
0 kPa (g)
60(2)
kg/m³
°C
kPa (g)
20 °C
0 kPa (g)
(1) Used only with API Table Letter = C.
(2) Used only with API Table Letter = E.
b) Set API Table Letter to the letter of the API table group that is appropriate for your process fluid.
API table letter
Process fluids
A
Generalized crude and JP4
B
Generalized products: Gasoline, jet fuel, aviation fuel, kerosene, heating oils,
fuel oils, diesel, gas oil
C(1)
Liquids with a constant base density or known thermal expansion coefficient
(TEC). You will be required to enter the TEC for your process fluid.
D
Lubricating oils
E(2)
NGL (Natural Gas Liquids) and LPG (Liquid Petroleum Gas)
(1) Used only with API Table Number = 6, 24, or 54.
(2) Used only with API Table Number = 23, 24, 53, 54, 59, or 60.
API Table Number and API Table Letter uniquely identify the API table. The selected API table is
displayed, and the meter automatically changes the density unit, temperature unit, pressure unit,
reference temperature, and reference pressure to match the API table.
Your choice also determines the API table that will be used to calculate the correction factor for volume
(CTPL or CTL).
Restriction
Not all combinations are supported by the API Referral application. See the list of API tables in this
manual.
4. If you chose a C table, enter Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) for your process fluid.
Acceptable limits:
•
230.0 x 10-6 to 930.0 x 10-6 per °F
•
414.0 x 10-6 to 1674.0 x 10-6 per °C
5. Refer to the API documentation and confirm your table selection.
a) Verify that your process fluid falls within range for line density, line temperature, and line
pressure.
b) Verify that the referred density range of the selected table is adequate for your application.
Configuration and Use Manual
55
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
6. If required, set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which density will be corrected in
referred density calculations.
The default reference temperature is determined by the selected API table.
7. If required, set Reference Pressure to the pressure to which density will be corrected in referred density
calculations.
The default reference pressure is determined by the selected API table. API Referral requires gauge
pressure.
Set up temperature and pressure data for API Referral using a field
communicator
The API Referral application uses temperature and, optionally, pressure data in its calculations. You must
decide how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup.
Note
Fixed values for temperature or pressure are not recommended. Using a fixed temperature or pressure value
may produce inaccurate process data.
Procedure
1. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Description
Internal RTD
temperature
data
Temperature data from the
on-board temperature sensor
(RTD) is used.
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for temperature data.
This data will be available in
addition to the internal RTD
temperature data.
Setup
a. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to Disable.
a. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to Enable.
c. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → External Polling.
d. Set Poll Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other Primary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
No other Secondary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
e. Choose an unused polling slot.
f. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external
temperature device.
g. Set Polled Variable to Temperature.
56
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Method
Description
Digital
communications
A host writes temperature data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals. This data will be
available in addition to the
internal RTD temperature data.
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Setup
a. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → Temperature.
b. Set Temperature Compensation to Enable.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write temperature data to the
meter at appropriate intervals.
2. Choose the method to be used to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Description
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for pressure data.
Setup
a. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → Pressure.
b. Set Pressure Compensation to Enable.
c. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → External Polling.
d. Choose an unused polling slot.
e. Set Poll Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other Primary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
No other Secondary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
f. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external
pressure device.
g. Set Polled Variable to Pressure.
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals.
a. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional
Setup → External Pressure/Temperature → Pressure.
b. Set Pressure Compensation to Enable.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write pressure data to the
transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
• Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART tag of the external device.
Configuration and Use Manual
57
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
•
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
For digital communications:
— Verify that the host has access to the required data.
— Verify that the host is writing to the correct register in memory, using the correct data type.
5.1.4 API tables supported by the API Referral application
The API tables listed here are supported by the API Referral application.
Table 5-1: API tables, process fluids, measurement units, and default reference values
Process fluid
Generalized crude
and JP4
API tables
(calculations)(1)
Lubricating oils
NGL (natural gas
liquids) and LPG
(liquid petroleum
gas)
Default
reference
temp
Default
reference
pressure
API standard
API MPMS 11.1
Referred
density(2)
CTL or
CTPL(3)(4)
5A
6A
Unit: °API
Range: 0 to 100 °API
60 °F
0 psi (g)
23A
24A
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.6110 to
1.0760 SGU
60 °F
0 psi (g)
53A
54A
Unit: kg/m3
Range: 610 to
1075 kg/m³
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
5B
6B
Unit: °API
Range: 0 to 85 °API
60 °F
0 psi (g)
24B
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.6535 to
1.0760 SGU
60 °F
0 psi (g)
54B
Unit: kg/m3
Range: 653 to
1075 kg/m³
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
N/A
6C
Unit: °API
60 °F
0 psi (g)
N/A
24C
Unit: SGU
60 °F
0 psi (g)
N/A
54C
Unit: kg/m³
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
5D
6D
Unit: °API
Range: −10 to
+40 °API
60 °F
0 psi (g)
23D
24D
Unit: SGU
Range: 0.8520 to
1.1640 SGU
60 °F
0 psi (g)
53D
54D
Unit: kg/m³
Range: 825 to
1164 kg/m³
15 °C
0 kPa (g)
23E
24E
Unit: SGU
60 °F
0 psi (g)
53E
54E
Unit: kg/m³
15 °C
0 psi (g)
59E
60E
Unit: kg/m³
20 °C
0 psi (g)
Generalized products
23B
(gasoline, jet fuel,
aviation fuel,
kerosene, heating
oils, fuel oils, diesel,
53B
gas oil)
Liquids with a
constant density
base or known
thermal expansion
coefficient(5)
Referred density
(API): unit and
range
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.1
API MPMS 11.2.4
(1) Each API table represents a specialized equation defined by the American Petroleum Institute for a specific
combination of process fluid, line conditions, and output.
58
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
(2) Referred density is calculated from line density. You must specify this table, either directly or by selecting the
process fluid and base density measurement unit.
(3) You do not need to specify this table. It is invoked automatically as a result of the previous table selection.
(4) CTL is a correction factor based on online temperature. CTPL is a correction factor based on both line
pressure and line temperature. Calculation of CTL and CTPL for A, B, C, and D table products is in
accordance with API MPMS Chapter 11.1. Calculation of CTL and CTPL for E table products is in accordance
with API MPMS Chapters 11.2.2, 11.2.4, and 11.2.5.
(5) The Thermal Expansion Coefficient (TEC) replaces the referred density calculation. Use the CTL/CTPL table
instead.
5.1.5 Process variables from the API Referral application
The API Referral application calculates several different process variables according to API standards.
CTPL
Correction factor based on line temperature and line pressure.
CTL
Correction factor based on line temperature at saturation conditions.
Referred density
The measured density after CTL or CTPL has been applied.
API volume flow
The measured volume flow rate after CTL or CTPL has been applied. Also called
corrected volume flow.
Batch-weighted
average density
One density value is recorded for each unit of flow (e.g., barrel, liter). The average is
calculated from these values. The average is reset when the API totalizer is reset. Not
available unless a totalizer has been configured with Source set to Corrected Volume
Flow.
Batch-weighted
average
temperature
One temperature value is recorded for each unit of flow (e.g., barrel, liter). The average
is calculated from these values. The average is reset when the API totalizer is reset.
Not available unless a totalizer has been configured with Source set to TemperatureCorrected Volume Flow.
API volume total
The total API volume measured by the transmitter since the last API totalizer reset. Also
called corrected volume total. Not available unless a totalizer has been configured with
Source set to Corrected Volume Flow.
API volume
inventory
The total API volume measured by the transmitter since the last API inventory reset.
Also called corrected volume inventory. Not available unless an inventory has been
configured with Source set to Corrected Volume Flow.
5.2 Set up concentration measurement
The concentration measurement application calculates concentration from line density and line temperature.
5.2.1 Preparing to set up concentration measurement
The procedure for setting up concentration measurement application depends on how your device was
ordered and how you want to use the application. Review this information before you begin.
Requirements for concentration measurement
To use the concentration measurement application, the following conditions must be met:
•
The concentration measurement application must be enabled.
•
The API Referral application must be disabled.
•
The Advanced Phase Measurement application must be disabled or set for the Liquid with Gas application.
•
A concentration matrix must be loaded into one of the six slots on the transmitter.
Configuration and Use Manual
59
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Tip
In most cases, the concentration matrix that you ordered was loaded at the factory. If it was not, you have
several options for loading a matrix. You can also build a matrix.
•
Temperature Source must be configured and set up.
•
One matrix must be selected as the active matrix (the matrix used for measurement).
Requirements for matrices
A matrix is the set of coefficients used to convert process data to concentration, plus related parameters. The
matrix can be saved as a file.
The transmitter requires all matrices to be in .matrix format. You can use ProLink III to load matrices in other
formats:
•
.xml (used by ProLink III)
The transmitter can store matrices in one of the six slots in memory.
Any matrix in a slot is available for use. In other words, it can be selected as the active matrix and used for
measurement. Matrices must be loaded into a slot before they can be used for measurement.
All matrices in slots must use the same derived variable.
Requirements for derived variables
A derived variable is the process variable that a concentration matrix measures. All other process variables are
calculated from the derived variable. There are eight possible derived variables. Each matrix is designed for
one specific derived variable.
The transmitter can store up to six matrices in six slots. All matrices in the six slots must use the same derived
variable. If you change the setting of Derived Variable, all matrices are deleted from the six slots.
Tip
Always ensure that Derived Variable is set correctly before loading matrices into slots.
Derived variables and net flow rate
If you want the transmitter to calculate Net Mass Flow Rate, the derived variable must be set to Mass
Concentration (Density). If your matrix is not designed for Mass Concentration (Density), contact customer
support for assistance.
If you want the transmitter to calculate Net Volume Flow Rate, the derived variable must be set to Volume
Concentration (Density). If your matrix is not designed for Volume Concentration (Density), contact customer
support for assistance.
Derived variables based on specific gravity
The following derived variables are based on specific gravity:
•
Specific Gravity
•
Concentration (Specific Gravity)
•
Mass Concentration (Specific Gravity)
•
Volume Concentration (Specific Gravity)
If you are using one of these derived variables, two additional parameters can be configured:
•
Reference Temperature of Water (default setting: 4 °C)
•
Water Density at Reference Temperature (default setting: 999.99988 kg/m³)
These two parameters are used to calculate specific gravity.
60
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
You cannot set these parameters from the display. If the default values are not appropriate, you must use
another method to set them.
Optional tasks in setting up concentration measurement
The following tasks are optional:
•
Modifying names and labels
•
Configuring extrapolation alerts
5.2.2 Set up concentration measurement using the display
This section guides you through most of the tasks related to setting up and implementing the concentration
measurement application.
Restriction
This section does not cover building a concentration matrix. For detailed information on building a matrix, see
the Micro Motion Enhanced Density Application Manual.
Enable concentration measurement using the display
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the
concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Disable the following applications before enabling concentration measurement as concentration
measurement cannot be enabled at the same time:
•
Advanced Phase Measurement — gas with liquid
•
API Referral
•
Gas Standard Volume
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement.
2. Choose Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings and ensure that Flow Type is set to Liquid.
3. Return to the Process Measurement menu.
4. If the API Referral application is displayed in the menu, choose API Referral and ensure that Enabled/
Disabled is set to Disabled.
The concentration measurement application and the API Referral application cannot be enabled
simultaneously.
5. If the Advanced Phase Measurement application is displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Phase
Measurement → Application Setup and ensure that Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled.
6. Enable concentration measurement.
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
b) Set Enabled/Disabled to Enabled.
Set up temperature data using the display
The concentration measurement application uses line temperature data in its calculations. You must decide
how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup. Temperature data from the
Configuration and Use Manual
61
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
on-board temperature sensor (RTD) is always available. Optionally, you can set up an external temperature
device and use external temperature data.
The temperature setup that you establish here will be used for all concentration measurement matrices on
this meter.
Important
Line temperature data is used in several different measurements and calculations. It is possible to use the
internal RTD temperature in some areas and an external temperature in others. The transmitter stores the
internal RTD temperature and the external temperature separately. However, the transmitter stores only one
alternate temperature value, which may be either the external temperature or the configured fixed value.
Accordingly, if you choose a fixed temperature for some uses, and an external temperature for others, the
external temperature will overwrite the fixed value.
Procedure
Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Description
Internal
temperature
Temperature data from
the on-board temperature
sensor (RTD) will be used
for all measurements and
calculations. No external
temperature data will be
available.
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for temperature data.
This data will be available
in addition to the internal
temperature data.
Setup
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to Off.
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to On.
c. Choose Poll External Device.
d. Select Polled Variable 1 or Polled Variable 2.
e. Set Variable to External Temperature.
f. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
g. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the external
temperature device.
Digital
communications
62
A host writes temperature data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals. This data will be
available in addition to the
internal temperature data.
a. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement →
Temperature.
b. Set External Temperature to On.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write temperature data to the
transmitter at appropriate intervals.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Postrequisites
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the value for External
Temperature.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART® tag of the external device.
Modify matrix names and labels using the display
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement
unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement → Configure
Matrix.
2. Select the matrix that you want to modify.
3. Set Matrix Name to the name that will be used for this matrix.
4. Set Concentration Unit to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
If you want to use a custom label, you can use the display to select Special. However, you cannot use
the display to configure the custom label. You must use another tool to change the label from Special to
a user-defined string.
Modify extrapolation alerts using the display
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control
the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density
or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However,
extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is
occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement → Configure
Matrix.
2. Select the matrix that you want to modify.
3. Set Extrapolation Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
4. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement → Configure
Application → Extrapolation Alerts.
5. Enable or disable the high and low limit alerts for temperature and density as desired.
Example: Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Limit is set to 5%, High Limit (Temp) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a
temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if
line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
Configuration and Use Manual
63
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Select the active concentration matrix using the display
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up
to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement → Configure
Application.
2. Set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use.
5.2.3 Set up concentration measurement using ProLink III
This section guides you through the tasks required to set up, configure, and implement concentration
measurement.
Enable concentration measurement using ProLink III
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the
concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Disable the following applications before enabling concentration measurement as concentration
measurement cannot be enabled at the same time:
•
Advanced Phase Measurement — gas with liquid
•
API Referral
•
Gas Standard Volume
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow and ensure that Volume Flow
Type is set to Liquid Volume.
2. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Advance Phase Measurement → APM
Status and ensure that Application Status is set to Disable or Liquid with Gas.
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Options.
4. Disable API Referral and set the Advance Phase Measurement application to Disabled or Single Liquid.
5. Set Concentration Measurement to Enabled and select Apply.
Load a concentration matrix using ProLink III
At least one concentration matrix must be loaded onto your transmitter. You can load up to six.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be enabled on your device.
For each concentration matrix that you want to load, you need a file containing the matrix data. The ProLink III
installation includes a set of standard concentration matrices. Other matrices are available from Emerson. The
file can be on your computer or in the transmitter internal memory.
The file must be in one of the formats that ProLink III supports. This includes:
•
.xml (ProLink III)
•
.matrix (1600)
64
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
If you are loading an .xml file, you must know the following information for your matrix:
•
The derived variable that the matrix is designed to calculate
•
The density unit that the matrix was built with
•
The temperature unit that the matrix was built with
If you are loading a .matrix file, you must know the derived variable that the matrix is designed to calculate.
Important
• All concentration matrices on your transmitter must use the same derived variable.
•
If you change the setting of Derived Variable, all existing concentration matrices will be deleted from the
six slots on the transmitter. Set Derived Variable before loading concentration matrices.
•
ProLink III loads matrices directly to one of the six transmitter slots.
Tip
In many cases, concentration matrices were ordered with the device and loaded at the factory. You may not
need to load any matrices.
Procedure
1. If you are loading an .xml file, choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Line
Density and set Density Unit to the density unit used by your matrix.
Important
When you load a matrix in one of these formats, if the density unit is not correct, concentration data will
be incorrect. The density units must match at the time of loading. You can change the density unit after
the matrix is loaded.
2. If you are loading an .xml file, choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Line
Temperature and set Temperature Unit to the temperature unit used by your matrix.
Important
When you load a matrix in one of these formats, if the temperature unit is not correct, concentration
data will be incorrect. The temperature units must match at the time of loading. You can change the
temperature unit after the matrix is loaded.
3. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to
perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
4. In Step 1, ensure that the setting of Derived Variable matches the derived variable used by your matrix.
If it does not, change it as required and select Apply.
Important
If you change the setting of Derived Variable, all existing concentration matrices will be deleted from
the six slots. Verify the setting of Derived Variable before continuing.
5. Load one or more matrices.
a) In Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the location (slot) to which the matrix will be loaded.
b) To load a .xml file from your computer, select Load Matrix from File, navigate to the file, and load
it.
c) To load a .matrix file from your computer, select Load Matrix from My Computer, navigate to the
file, and load it.
d) To load a .matrix file from the transmitter internal memory, select Load Matrix from 1600 Device
Memory, navigate to the file on the transmitter, and load it.
Configuration and Use Manual
65
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
e) Repeat until all required matrices are loaded.
Set reference temperature values for specific gravity using ProLink III
When Derived Variable is set to any option based on specific gravity, you must set the reference temperature
for water, then verify the density of water at the configured reference temperature. These values affect
specific gravity measurement.
This requirement applies to the following derived variables:
•
Specific Gravity
•
Concentration (Specific Gravity)
•
Mass Concentration (Specific Gravity)
•
Volume Concentration (Specific Gravity)
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to
perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and select Change
Matrix.
3. Scroll to Step 3, then perform the following actions:
a) Set Reference Temperature for Referred Density to the temperature to which line density will be
corrected for use in the specific gravity calculation.
b) Set Reference Temperature for Water to the water temperature that will be used in the specific
gravity calculation.
c) Set Water Density at Reference Temperature to the density of water at the specified reference
temperature.
The transmitter automatically calculates the density of water at the specified temperature. The
new value will be displayed the next time that transmitter memory is read. You can enter a
different value if you prefer.
4. Select Apply at the bottom of Step 3.
Set up temperature data using ProLink III
The concentration measurement application uses line temperature data in its calculations. You must decide
how to provide this data, then perform the required configuration and setup. Temperature data from the
on-board temperature sensor (RTD) is always available. Optionally, you can set up an external temperature
device and use external temperature data.
The temperature setup that you establish here will be used for all concentration measurement matrices on
this meter.
Important
Line temperature data is used in several different measurements and calculations. It is possible to use the
internal RTD temperature in some areas and an external temperature in others. The transmitter stores the
internal RTD temperature and the external temperature separately. However, the transmitter stores only one
alternate temperature value, which may be either the external temperature or the configured fixed value.
Accordingly, if you choose a fixed temperature for some uses, and an external temperature for others, the
external temperature will overwrite the fixed value.
66
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to
perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 4.
3. Choose the method to be used to supply temperature data, and perform the required setup.
Option
Description
Internal
temperature
Temperature data from
the on-board temperature
sensor (RTD) will be used
for all measurements and
calculations. No external
temperature data will be
available.
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for temperature data.
This data will be available in
addition to the internal RTD
temperature data.
Setup
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Internal.
b. Click Apply.
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
Other HART masters will be on the
network. A field communicator is not
a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature
device.
e. Click Apply.
Digital
communications
A host writes temperature data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals. This data will be
available in addition to the
internal RTD temperature data.
a. Set Line Temperature Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Click Apply.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write temperature data to the
meter at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs
group on the ProLink III main window.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART® tag of the external device.
Configuration and Use Manual
67
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Modify matrix names and labels using ProLink III
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement
unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to
perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and click Change Matrix.
3. Scroll to Step 3, then perform the following actions:
a) Set Concentration Units Label to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
b) If you set Concentration Units Label to Special, enter the custom label in User-Defined Label.
c) In Matrix Name, enter the name to be used for the matrix.
4. Select Apply at the bottom of Step 3.
Modify extrapolation alerts using ProLink III
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control
the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density
or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However,
extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is
occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
The Concentration Measurement window is displayed. It is organized into steps that allow you to
perform several different setup and configuration tasks. For this task, you will not use all the steps.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify, and click Change Matrix.
3. Scroll to Step 4.
4. Set Extrapolation Alert Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
5. Enable or disable the high and low limit alerts for temperature and density, as desired, and click Apply.
Example: Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Limit is set to 5%, High Limit (Temp) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a
temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if
line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
Select the active concentration matrix using ProLink III
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up
to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration Measurement.
2. Scroll to Step 2, set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use and select Change Matrix.
68
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
5.2.4 Set up concentration measurement using a field communicator
This section guides you through most of the tasks related to setting up and implementing the concentration
measurement application.
Enable concentration measurement using a field communicator
The concentration measurement application must be enabled before you can perform any setup. If the
concentration measurement application was enabled at the factory, you do not need to enable it now.
Prerequisites
The concentration measurement application must be licensed on your transmitter.
Disable the following applications before enabling concentration measurement as concentration
measurement cannot be enabled at the same time:
•
Advanced Phase Measurement — gas with liquid
•
API Referral
•
Gas Standard Volume
Procedure
1. Choose Device Settings → Device Information → Licenses → Enable/Disable Applications and ensure
that Volume Flow Type is set to Liquid.
2. Choose Device Settings → Device Information → Licenses → Enable/Disable Applications.
3. Enable the concentration measurement application.
Set reference temperature values for specific gravity using a field
communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Matrix → Reference Conditions
When Derived Variable is set to any option based on specific gravity, you must set the reference temperature
for water, then verify the density of water at the configured reference temperature. These values affect
specific gravity measurement.
To check the setting of Derived Variable, choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup →
Concentration Measurement → CM Configuration.
Important
Do not change the setting of Derived Variable. If you change the setting of Derived Variable, all existing
concentration matrices will be deleted from transmitter memory.
Procedure
1. Set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify.
2. Choose Reference Conditions, then perform the following actions:
a) Set Reference Temperature to the temperature to which line density will be corrected for use in
the specific gravity calculation.
b) Set Water Reference Temperature to the water temperature that will be used in the specific
gravity calculation.
c) Set Water Reference Density to the density of water at the specified reference temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual
69
Configure process measurement applications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
The transmitter automatically calculates the density of water at the specified temperature. The
new value will be displayed the next time that transmitter memory is read. Optionally, you can
enter a different value.
Modify matrix names and labels using a field communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Matrix
For convenience, you can change the name of a concentration matrix and the label used for its measurement
unit. This does not affect measurement.
Procedure
1. Set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify.
2. Set Matrix Name to the name to be used for the matrix.
3. Set Concentration Unit to the label that will be used for the concentration unit.
4. If you set Concentration Unit to Special, choose Label and enter the custom label.
Modify extrapolation alerts using a field communicator
You can enable and disable extrapolation alerts, and set extrapolation alert limits. These parameters control
the behavior of the concentration measurement application but do not affect measurement directly.
Each concentration matrix is built for a specific density range and a specific temperature range. If line density
or line temperature goes outside the range, the transmitter will extrapolate concentration values. However,
extrapolation may affect accuracy. Extrapolation alerts are used to notify the operator that extrapolation is
occurring.
Each concentration matrix has its own extrapolation alert limits.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Concentration Measurement →
Configure Matrix.
2. Set Matrix Being Configured to the matrix you want to modify.
3. Set Extrapolation Alert Limit to the point, in percent, at which an extrapolation alert will be posted.
4. Choose Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup → CM Extrapolation Alerts.
5. Enable or disable the high and low alerts for temperature and density, as desired.
Extrapolation alerts in action
If Extrapolation Limit is set to 5%, High Limit (Temp) is enabled, and the active matrix is built for a
temperature range of 40 °F (4.4 °C) to 80 °F (26.7 °C), a high-temperature extrapolation alert will be posted if
line temperature goes above 82 °F (27.8 °C).
Select the active concentration matrix using a field communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Concentration Measurement → CM
Configuration
You must select the concentration matrix to be used for measurement. Although the transmitter can store up
to six concentration matrices, only one matrix can be used for measurement at any one time.
Procedure
Set Active Matrix to the matrix you want to use.
70
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
6 Configure advanced options for process
measurement
6.1 Configure Response Time
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response Time
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Response Time
Field communicator
Not available
Response Time controls the speed of various internal processes that are involved in retrieving electronic data
from the sensor and converting it to process data.
Response Time affects all process and diagnostic variables.
Procedure
Set Response Time as desired.
Option
Description
Normal
Appropriate for typical applications.
High Filtering Slower response. Appropriate for applications with significant amount of entrained gas or
process noise.
Low Filtering
Fastest response. Appropriate for proving or filling applications.
6.2 Detect and report two-phase flow
Two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas process) can cause a variety of process control issues.
The transmitter provides two methods to detect and report or respond to two-phase flow.
6.2.1 Detect two-phase flow using density
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Expand Two-Phase Flow
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Two-Phase Flow
The transmitter can use line density data to detect two-phase flow (gas in a liquid process or liquid in a gas
process). The density limits are user-specified. When two-phase flow is detected, an alert is posted.
Procedure
1. Set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to the lowest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values below this will cause the transmitter to post a Process Aberration alert. If no two-phase flow is
expected, leave this value at 0.
Tip
Gas entrainment can cause your process density to drop temporarily. To reduce the occurrence of
two-phase flow alerts that are not significant to your process, set Two-Phase Flow Low Limit slightly
below your expected lowest process density.
Configuration and Use Manual
71
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
You must enter Two-Phase Flow Low Limit in g/cm³, even if you configured another unit for density
measurement.
•
Default: 0 g/cm³
•
Range: 0 g/cm³ to the sensor limit
2. Set Two-Phase Flow High Limit to the highest density value that is considered normal in your process.
Values above this will cause the transmitter to post a Process Aberration alert.
Tip
To reduce the occurrence of two-phase flow alerts that are not significant to your process, set TwoPhase Flow High Limit slightly above your expected highest process density. For most applications,
leaving the Two-Phase Flow High Limit at 5.0 g/cc will suffice.
You must enter Two-Phase Flow High Limit in g/cm³, even if you configured another unit for density
measurement.
•
Default: 5 g/cm³
•
Range: 5 g/cm³ to the sensor limit
3. Set Two-Phase Flow Timeout to the number of seconds that the transmitter will wait for a two-phase
flow condition to clear before posting the alert.
•
Default: 0 seconds, meaning that the alert will be posted immediately
•
Range: 0 to 60 seconds
6.2.2 Detect two-phase flow using sensor diagnostics
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Source
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → mA Output
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Mapping/Source → Output Source → mAO x Source
The transmitter always monitors sensor diagnostics and applies a two-phase flow algorithm. You can assign
an mA Output to report the results of this calculation: single-phase flow, moderate two-phase flow, or severe
two-phase flow. Severe two-phase flow can cause the meter to stop functioning.
Prerequisites
Channel B must be configured as mA Output.
Procedure
Set mA Output Source to Two-Phase Flow Detection.
The signal from the mA Output indicates the current state of the process:
•
12 mA: Single-phase flow
•
16 mA: Moderate two-phase flow
•
20 mA: Severe two-phase flow
6.3 Configure Flow Rate Switch
Display
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events → Flow Rate Switch
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Source → Flow Switch
Indication
72
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Field communicator
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output x → Flow Switch
Flow Rate Switch is used to indicate that the flow rate has moved past a user-specified setpoint, in either
direction. The flow rate switch is implemented with a user-configurable hysteresis.
Typically, a Discrete Output is assigned as the flow rate switch indicator. The Discrete Output can be wired to
an external device such as a light or a horn.
Prerequisites
A channel must be configured as a Discrete Output, and the Discrete Output must be available for this use.
Procedure
1. Set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, if you have not already done so.
2. Set Flow Switch Variable to the flow variable that you want to use to control the flow rate switch.
3. Set Flow Switch Setpoint to the value at which the flow switch will be triggered (after Hysteresis is
applied).
Depending on the polarity of the Discrete Output:
•
If the flow rate is below this value, the Discrete Output is ON.
•
If the flow rate is above this value, the Discrete Output is OFF.
4. Set Hysteresis to the percentage of variation above and below the setpoint that will operate as a
deadband.
Hysteresis defines a range around the setpoint within which the flow rate switch will not change.
•
Default: 5%
•
Range: 0.1% to 10%
Example
If Flow Switch Setpoint = 100 g/sec and Hysteresis = 5%, and the first measured flow rate is above
100 g/sec, the discrete output is OFF. It will remain OFF unless the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec. If this
happens, the discrete output will turn ON, and remain ON until the flow rate rises above 105 g/sec. At
this point it turns OFF and will remain OFF until the flow rate drops below 95 g/sec.
Related information
Configure a Discrete Output
6.4 Configure events
An event occurs when the real-time value of a user-specified process variable moves past a user-defined
setpoint. Events are used to provide notification of process changes or to perform specific transmitter actions
if a process change occurs.
6.4.1 Configure a basic event
Display
Not available
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Basic Events
Field communicator
Not available
Configuration and Use Manual
73
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
A basic event is used to provide notification of process changes. A basic event occurs (is ON) if the real-time
value of a user-specified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint. Event status
can be queried via digital communications, and a Discrete Output can be configured to report event status.
You can define up to two basic events.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Assign a process variable to the event.
3. Specify Event Type.
Option
Description
HI
x>A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is greater
than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
LO
x<A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is less than
the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
4. Set a value for Setpoint A.
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
6.4.2 Configure an enhanced event
Display
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Events → Enhanced Events
Field communicator
Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events
An enhanced event is used to provide notification of process changes and, optionally, to perform specific
transmitter actions if the event occurs. An enhanced event occurs (is ON) if the real-time value of a userspecified process variable moves above (HI) or below (LO) a user-defined setpoint, or in range (IN) or out of
range (OUT) with respect to two user-defined setpoints.
You can define up to five enhanced events. For each enhanced event, you can assign one or more actions that
the transmitter will perform if the enhanced event occurs.
Procedure
1. Select the event that you want to configure.
2. Assign a process variable to the event.
3. Specify Event Type.
74
Option
Description
HI
x>A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is greater
than the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
LO
x<A
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is less than
the setpoint (Setpoint A), endpoint not included.
IN
A≤x≤B
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Option
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Description
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is in range,
that is, between Setpoint A and Setpoint B, endpoints included.
OUT
x ≤ A or x ≥ B
The event occurs when the value of the assigned process variable (x) is out
of range, that is, less than Setpoint A or greater than Setpoint B, endpoints
included.
4. Set values for the required setpoints.
• For HI and LO events, set Setpoint A.
•
For IN and OUT events, set Setpoint A and Setpoint B.
5. Optional: Configure a Discrete Output to switch states in response to the event status.
6. Optional: Specify the action or actions that the transmitter will perform when the event occurs.
Option
Description
Display
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events, select any
enhanced event, and choose Assign Actions
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Inputs → Action Assignment
Field communicator
Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup → Enhanced Events
Options for Enhanced Event Action
Action
Label
Display
ProLink III
Field communicator
Start Zero Calibration
Start Sensor Zero
Start Sensor Zero
Start/stop all totalizers and
inventories
Start/stop all totalizers
Start or Stop All Totalizers
Start/Stop All Totals
Reset totalizer X
Reset Total X
Totalizer X
Reset Total X
Reset all totalizers and
inventories
Reset All Totals
Reset All Totals
Reset All Totals
Increment Matrix
Increment ED Curve
Increment Curve
Standard
Start sensor zero
Totalizers
Concentration measurement
Increment CM matrix
Smart Meter Verification
Start Meter Verification test
Start Smart Meter
Verification
6.5 Configure totalizers and inventories
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Totalizers & Inventories
ProLink III
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers
Configuration and Use Manual
75
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Field communicator
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Configure Totalizers/Inventories
The transmitter provides seven configurable totalizers and seven configurable inventories. Each totalizer and
each inventory can be configured independently.
Totalizers track the process since the last totalizer reset. Inventories track the process since the last inventory
reset. Inventories are typically used to track the process across totalizer resets.
Tip
The default configurations cover the most typical uses of totalizers and inventories. You may not need to
change any configurations.
Prerequisites
Before configuring the totalizers and inventories, ensure that the process variables you plan to track are
available on the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Select the totalizer or inventory that you want to configure.
2. Set Totalizer Source or Inventory Source to the process variable that the totalizer or inventory will track.
Option
Description
Mass flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Mass Flow Rate and calculate total
mass since the last reset.
Volume flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Volume Flow Rate and calculate total
volume since the last reset.
Gas standard volume
flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate and
calculate total volume since the last reset.
Temperature-corrected
volume flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Temperature-Corrected Volume Flow
Rate and calculate total volume since the last reset.
Standard volume flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Standard Volume Flow Rate and
calculate total volume since the last reset.
Net mass flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Net Mass Flow Rate and calculate total
mass since the last reset.
Net volume flow
The totalizer or inventory will track Net Volume Flow Rate and calculate
total volume since the last reset.
Note
The totalizer/inventory value will not automatically be reset when the source is changed. The user must
manually reset the totalizer/inventory.
Tip
If you are using the API Referral application and you want to measure batch-weighted average density
or batch-weighted average temperature, you must have a totalizer configured to measure temperaturecorrected volume flow.
3. Set Totalizer Direction to specify how the totalizer or inventory will respond to forward or reverse flow.
76
Option
Flow direction
Totalizer and inventory behavior
Forward Only
Forward
Totals increment
Reverse
Totals do not change
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Option
Flow direction
Totalizer and inventory behavior
Reverse Only
Forward
Totals do not change
Reverse
Totals increment
Forward
Totals increment
Reverse
Totals decrement
Forward
Totals increment
Reverse
Totals increment
Bidirectional
Absolute Value
Important
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that
the transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Table 6-1: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and
totalizers
Forward (same direction as Flow
arrow on sensor)
With Arrow
Forward
Against Arrow
Reverse
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow
on sensor)
With Arrow
Reverse
Against Arrow
Forward
Actual flow direction
4. Optional: Set User Name to the name you want to use for the inventory or totalizer.
User-Defined Label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
The transmitter automatically generates a name for each totalizer and inventory, based on its source,
direction, and type.
Example
•
Source = Mass Flow
•
Direction = Forward Only
•
User-Defined Label = Mass Fwd Total
Example
•
Source = Gas Standard Volume Flow
•
Direction = Bidirectional
•
User-Defined Label = GSV Bidir Inv
The specified name is used on the transmitter display and on all interfaces that support it. If User Name
contains only spaces, the transmitter-generated name is used. Not all interfaces support totalizer and
inventory names.
Example: Checking for backflow
You suspect that there is a significant amount of backflow through the sensor. To collect data, configure two
totalizers as follows:
•
Source = Mass Flow, Direction = Forward Only
•
Source = Mass Flow, Direction = Reverse Only
Configuration and Use Manual
77
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Reset both totalizers, allow them to run for an appropriate period, then look at the amount of reverse flow as a
percentage of forward flow.
Example: Tracking three different process fluids
Three tanks are connected to a loading dock through a single meter. Each tank contains a different process
fluid. You want to track each process fluid separately.
1. Set up three totalizers, one for each tank.
2. Name the totalizers Tank 1, Tank 2, and Tank 3.
3. Configure each totalizer as required for the corresponding process fluid.
4. Stop and reset all three totalizers to ensure that the beginning values are 0.
5. When loading from a tank, start the corresponding totalizer, and stop it when the load is finished.
6.5.1 Default settings for totalizers and inventories
Totalizer or
inventory
Source (process variable
assignment
Direction
Name of totalizer
Name of inventory
1
Mass flow
Forward Only
Mass Fwd Total
Mass Fwd Inv
2
Volume flow
Forward Only
Volume Fwd Total
Volume Fwd Inv
3
Temperature-corrected volume
flow
Forward Only
API Volume Fwd Total
API Volume Fwd Inv
4
Gas standard volume flow
Forward Only
GSV Fwd Total
GSV Fwd Inv
5
Standard volume flow
Forward Only
Standard Vol Fwd Total
Standard Vol Fwd Inv
6
Net mass flow
Forward Only
Net Mass Fwd Total
Net Mass Fwd Inv
7
Net volume flow
Forward Only
Net Vol Fwd Total
Net Vol Fwd Inv
6.6 Configure logging for totalizers and inventories
Display
Menu → Configuration → Totalizer Log
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Log
Field communicator
Not available
The transmitter can write the current value of four totalizers or inventories to a log, at user-specified intervals.
You can generate a log file from this data for viewing and analysis.
Procedure
1. Specify the date on which totalizer logging will begin.
You must specify a future date. If you try to specify the current date, the transmitter will reject the
setting.
2. Specify the time at which totalizer logging will begin.
78
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
3. Specify the number of hours between records.
4. Select up to four totalizers or inventories to be logged.
6.7 Configure Process Variable Fault Action
Display
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing
Field communicator
Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup → Output Fault Action
Process Variable Fault Action specifies the values that will be reported via the display and digital
communications if the device encounters a fault condition. The values are also sent to the outputs for
processing against their configured fault actions.
Procedure
Set Process Variable Fault Action as desired.
Default: None
Restriction
If you set Process Variable Fault Action to NAN, you cannot set mA Output Fault Action or Frequency Output
Fault Action to None. If you try to do this, the transmitter will not accept the configuration.
Important
• If you want the mA Output to continue reporting process data during fault conditions, you must set both
Process Variable Fault Action and mA Output Fault Action to None. If mA Output Fault Action is set to
None and Process Variable Fault Action is set to any other option, the mA Output will produce the signal
associated with the selection.
•
If you want the Frequency Output to continue reporting process data during fault conditions, you must set
both Process Variable Fault Action and Frequency Output Fault Action to None. If Frequency Output Fault
Action is set to None and Process Variable Fault Action is set to any other option, the Frequency Output
will produce the signal associated with the selection.
6.7.1 Options for Process Variable Fault Action
Label
Display
ProLink III
Upscale
Upscale
Downscale
Downscale
Configuration and Use Manual
Description
•
Process variable values indicate that the value is greater
than the upper sensor limit.
•
Totalizers stop incrementing.
•
Process variable values indicate that the value is lower
than the lower sensor limit.
•
Totalizers stop incrementing.
79
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
Label
Display
ProLink III
Zero
Zero
Not-a-Number (NAN)
Flow to Zero
None (default)
Not a Number
Flow to Zero
None
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Description
•
Flow rate variables go to the value that represents a flow
rate of 0 (zero).
•
Density is reported as 0.
•
Temperature is reported as 0 °C , or the equivalent if
other units are used (e.g., 32 °F .
•
Drive gain is reported as measured.
•
Totalizers stop incrementing.
•
Process variables are reported as IEEE NAN.
•
Drive gain is reported as measured.
•
Modbus scaled integers are reported as Max Int.
•
Totalizers stop incrementing.
•
Flow rates are reported as 0.
•
Other process variables are reported as measured.
•
Totalizers stop incrementing.
•
All process variables are reported as measured.
•
Totalizers increment if they are running.
6.7.2 Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and other fault
actions
The setting of Process Variable Fault Action affects the operation of the mA Outputs, Frequency Outputs, and
Discrete Outputs if the corresponding output fault actions are set to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and mA Output Fault Action
If mA Output Fault Action is set to None, the mA Output signal depends on the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action.
If the device detects a fault condition:
1. Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
2. mA Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, the output reports the value associated with the setting of Process Variable Fault
Action.
•
If it is set to any other option, the output performs the specified fault action.
If you want the mA Output to continue to report process data during fault conditions, you must set both mA
Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and Frequency Output Fault Action
If Frequency Output Fault Action is set to None, the Frequency Output signal depends on the setting of
Process Variable Fault Action.
If the device detects a fault condition:
1. Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
80
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
2. Frequency Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, the output reports the value associated with the setting of Process Variable Fault
Action.
•
If it is set to any other option, the output performs the specified fault action.
If you want the Frequency Output to continue to report process data during fault conditions, you must set
both Frequency Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and Discrete Output Fault Action
If Discrete Output Fault Action is set to None and Discrete Output Source is set to Flow Rate Switch, the
Discrete Output state during a fault depends on the setting of Process Variable Fault Action.
If the device detects a fault condition:
1. Process Variable Fault Action is evaluated and applied.
2. Discrete Output Fault Action is evaluated.
• If it is set to None, and Discrete Output Source is set to Flow Rate Switch, the Discrete Output will
use the value determined by the current setting of Process Variable Fault Action to determine if a
flow rate switch has occurred.
•
If Discrete Output Source is set to any other option, the setting of Process Variable Fault Action is
irrelevant to the behavior of the Discrete Output during fault conditions. The Discrete Output is set
to the specified fault action.
If you want the Discrete Output to report a flow rate switch appropriately during fault conditions, you must set
both Discrete Output Fault Action and Process Variable Fault Action to None.
Related information
Configure mA Output Fault Action
Configure Frequency Output Fault Action
Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
Configuration and Use Manual
81
Configure advanced options for process measurement
May 2024
82
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
7 Configure device options and preferences
7.1 Configure the transmitter display
You can control the language used on the display, the process variables shown on the display, and a variety of
display behaviors.
7.1.1 Configure the language used on the display
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Language
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Language
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Language → Language
Language controls the language that the display uses for process data, menus, and information.
The languages available depend on your transmitter model and version.
Procedure
Set Language to the desired language.
7.1.2 Configure the process variables shown on the display
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Display Variables
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Variables
You can control the process variables shown on the display and the order in which they appear. The display
can scroll through up to 15 process variables in any order you choose. This configuration applies to both
auto-scroll and manual scrolling.
By default, one process variable is shown at a time. You can configure a custom display screen that shows two
process variables at a time.
Restriction
You cannot remove all display variables. At least one display variable must be configured.
Notes
• If you have a display variable configured to show a volume process variable, and you change Volume Flow
Type to Gas Standard Volume, the display variable is automatically changed to the equivalent GSV variable,
and vice versa.
•
For all other display variables, if the process variable becomes unavailable due to changes in configuration,
the transmitter will not display that variable.
Procedure
For each display variable, select the process variable to be shown in that position in the rotation.
You can skip positions and you can repeat process variables.
Configuration and Use Manual
83
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 7-1: Default configuration for display variables
Display variable
Process variable assignment
Display Variable 1
Mass flow rate
Display Variable 2
Mass total
Display Variable 3
Volume flow rate
Display Variable 4
Volume total
Display Variable 5
Density
Display Variable 6
Temperature
Display Variable 7
Drive gain
Display Variable 8
None
Display Variable 9
None
Display Variable 10
None
Display Variable 11
None
Display Variable 12
None
Display Variable 13
None
Display Variable 14
None
Display Variable 15
None
7.1.3 Configure a two-line display screen
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Display Variables → 2-Value View
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → 2 PV Screen Slot #X
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → General Settings → Language
You can configure one display screen to show two process variables at a time. For each of these process
variables, the current value and the measurement is shown.
The two-line display screen operates like one of the basic 15 screens. You can use ˅ and ˄ to scroll to it. If Auto
Scroll is enabled, the two-line screen will be the last screen in the cycle.
7.1.4 Configure the number of decimal places (precision) shown on the
display
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Decimals on Display
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Variables → Decimal Places for x
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Decimal Places
You can specify the precision (the number of decimal places) that the display uses for each display variable.
You can set the precision independently for each display variable.
The display precision does not affect the actual value of the variable, the value used in calculations, or the
value reported via outputs or digital communications.
Procedure
1. Select a process variable or a diagnostic variable.
84
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
You can configure the precision for all variables, whether or not they are assigned as display variables.
The configured precision will be stored and used when applicable.
2. Set Number of Decimal Places to the number of decimal places to be used when this variable is shown
on the display.
•
Default:
— Temperature variables: 2
— All other variables: 4
•
Range: 0 to 5
Tip
The lower the precision, the greater the change must be for it to be reflected on the display. Do not set
Number of Decimal Places too low to be useful.
7.1.5 Turn on and turn off automatic scrolling through the display
variables
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings → Auto Scroll
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Auto Scroll
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Behavior → Auto Scroll
You can configure the display to automatically scroll through the list of display variables or to show a single
display variable until the operator activates Scroll. If Auto Scroll is turned on, you can configure the number of
seconds that each display variable will be shown.
Procedure
1. Turn on or turn off Auto Scroll as desired.
Option Description
On
The display automatically shows each display variable for the number of seconds specified by
Scroll Rate, then shows the next display variable. The operator can move to the next display
variable at any time by activating Scroll.
Off
The display shows Display Variable 1 and does not scroll automatically. The operator can move
to the next display variable at any time by activating Scroll.
Default: Off
2. If you turned on Auto Scroll, set Scroll Rate as desired.
•
Default: 10
•
Range: 1 to 30 seconds
Tip
Scroll Rate may not be available until you apply Auto Scroll.
7.1.6 Configure the display backlight
Display
Menu → Configuration → Display Settings
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → General → Backlight
Configuration and Use Manual
85
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Field communicator
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Device Settings → Display → Backlight
You can control the intensity and contrast of the backlight on the display's LCD panel.
Procedure
You can set the backlight and Auto Contrast on the display's LCD panel to either ON or OFF.
When Auto Contrast is OFF, you can also set Contrast as desired (Default: 50).
7.1.7 Configure security for the display
Display
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Transmitter Display → Display Security
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Behavior
When using the display, you can require users to enter a password to do any of the following tasks:
•
Enter the main menu
•
Change a parameter
•
Access alert data through the display
•
Start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories via the context menu
The display password can be the same or different from the totalizer/inventory context menu control
password. If different, the display password is used to reset, start, and stop totalizers or inventories using
Menu → Operations → Totalizers.
Procedure
1. Configure Password Required as desired.
Option
Description
At Write
When an user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are
prompted to enter the display password.
Enter Menu
When the menu is selected from the process variable screen, the display password
will be immediately required if Password Required is set.
Never (default) When a user chooses an action that leads to a configuration change, they are
prompted to enter a specific button sequence ( ⇦⇧⇩⇨). This is designed to protect
against accidental changes to configuration. It is not a security measure.
2. If the At Write or Enter Menu option was selected, enable or disable alert security as desired.
Option
Description
Enabled
If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display but
the alert banner is not displayed. If the operator attempts to enter the alert menu, they are
prompted to enter the display password.
Disabled If an alert is active, the alert symbol ⓘ is shown in the lower right corner of the display
and the alert banner is displayed automatically. No password or confirmation is required to
enter the alert menu.
86
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Restriction
You cannot set Password Required to Never and enable alert security.
•
If you did not enable Password Required, alert security is disabled and cannot be enabled.
•
Alert security is disabled automatically if you set Password Required to Never after:
— Password Required is initially set to either At Write or Enter Menu.
— Alert security is enabled.
3. If Password Required has been set to At Write or Enter Menu, you will be prompted to enter the desired
password.
•
Default: AAAA
•
Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
•
Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/inventory control
context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required but you do not change the display password, the transmitter will post
a configuration alert.
4. Configure Main Menu Available as desired.
Option
Description
Enabled
The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will be accessible.
Disabled
The local display Menu option from the process variable screen will not be accessible.
Important
Once Main Menu Available is disabled, it cannot be enabled from the local display. Use another
configuration tool, such as ProLink III, to re-enable main menu access from the local display.
7.1.8 Configure totalizer and inventory control
Display
Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security → Totalizers & Inventories
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Control Methods
Field communicator
Device Settings → Display → Display Behavior
You can enable or disable the operator's ability to start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories. The totalizer/
inventory control context menus password can also be configured. The context menu is accessed by selecting
the options menu from the process variable screen when a total or inventory is displayed.
These parameters do not affect the operator's ability to start, stop, or reset totalizers or inventories using
another tool.
Procedure
1. Enable or disable Reset Totalizers, as desired.
Default = Enable
2. Enable or disable Start/Stop Totalizers, as desired.
Default = Enable
3. Enable or disable Reset Inventory, as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual
87
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Default = Disable
4. Enable or disable Start/Stop Inventory, as desired.
Default = Disable
5. If required, configure the totalizer/inventory control context menu password.
Option
Description
No password
(default)
Start, stop or reset totalizer/inventory actions via the context menu do not
require a password.
Password Required When a user selects Start/Stop or Reset from the context menu and the
password is enabled for totalizer/inventory control, the user is required to enter
a password before the action occurs.
If the context menu password option has been set to Password Required, you will be prompted to enter
the password.
•
Default: AAAA
•
Range: Any four alphanumeric characters
•
The display Password Required must be set to At Write or Enter Menu to enable the totalizer/
inventory control context menu password option.
Important
If you enable Password Required for totalizers and inventories, but you do not change the password
from the default, the transmitter will post a configuration alert.
7.2 Configure the transmitter response to alerts
7.2.1 Configure the transmitter response to alerts using the display
For some alerts, you can change the transmitter response to an alert by setting the alert severity. You can also
configure the transmitter to ignore some alerts and conditions.
The transmitter implements the NAMUR NE 107 specification for alerts. NAMUR NE 107 categorizes alerts by
the suggested operator action, not by cause or symptom. Each alert has one or more associated conditions.
Important
The transmitter reports all the process and device conditions that were reported by previous transmitters.
However, the transmitter does not report them as individual alerts. Instead, the transmitter reports them as
conditions associated with alerts.
Procedure
•
To change the severity of an alert:
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts.
b) Select the alert.
c) Set Alert Severity as desired.
88
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Option
Description
Failure
The event is serious enough to require fault actions by the transmitter. The event may be
either device-related or process-related. Operator action is strongly recommended.
Function Check Configuration change or device testing. No fault actions are performed. The operator
may need to complete a procedure.
•
Out of
Specification
The process is outside user-specified limits or device limits. No fault actions are
performed. The operator should check the process.
Maintenance
Required
Device maintenance is recommended, either near-term or mid-term.
To ignore an alert:
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts.
b) Select the alert.
c) Set Alert Detection to Ignore.
If an alert is ignored, any occurrence of this alert is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the
transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
•
To ignore a condition:
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts.
b) Select the alert associated with the condition.
c) Select Condition Detection.
d) Select the condition and set it to Ignore.
If a condition is ignored, any occurrence of this condition is not posted to the alert list and the status LED
on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
7.2.2 Configure the transmitter response to alerts using ProLink III
For some alerts, you can change the transmitter response to an alert by setting the alert severity. You can also
configure the transmitter to ignore some alerts and conditions.
The transmitter implements the NAMUR NE 107 specification for alerts. NAMUR NE 107 categorizes alerts by
the suggested operator action, not by cause or symptom. Each alert has one or more associated conditions.
Important
The transmitter reports all the process and device conditions that were reported by previous transmitters.
However, the transmitter does not report them as individual alerts. Instead, the transmitter reports them as
conditions associated with alerts.
Procedure
•
To change the severity of an alert:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Alert Severity.
b) Select the alert.
c) Set the severity as desired.
Configuration and Use Manual
89
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Option
Description
Failure
The event is serious enough to require fault actions by the transmitter. The event may be
either device-related or process-related. Operator action is strongly recommended.
Function Check Configuration change or device testing. No fault actions are performed. The operator
may need to complete a procedure.
•
Out of
Specification
The process is outside user-specified limits or device limits. No fault actions are
performed. The operator should check the process.
Maintenance
Required
Device maintenance is recommended, either near-term or mid-term.
To ignore an alert:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Alert Severity.
b) Select the alert.
c) Set the severity to Ignore.
If an alert is ignored, any occurrence of this alert is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the
transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
•
To ignore a condition:
a) Choose Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Response to Alerts.
b) Select the alert associated with the condition and expand it.
c) Select the condition and set it to Ignore.
If a condition is ignored, any occurrence of this condition is not posted to the alert list and the status LED
on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
7.2.3 Configure the transmitter response to alerts using a field
communicator
For some alerts, you can change the transmitter response to an alert by setting the alert severity. You can also
configure the transmitter to ignore some alerts and conditions.
The transmitter implements the NAMUR NE 107 specification for alerts. NAMUR NE 107 categorizes alerts by
the suggested operator action, not by cause or symptom. Each alert has one or more associated conditions.
Important
The transmitter reports all the process and device conditions that were reported by previous transmitters.
However, the transmitter does not report them as individual alerts. Instead, the transmitter reports them as
conditions associated with alerts.
Procedure
•
To change the severity of an alert:
a) Choose Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup.
b) Choose the category of the alert: Sensor, Configuration, Process, or Output.
c) Select the alert.
d) Set the severity as desired.
90
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Option
Description
Failure
The event is serious enough to require fault actions by the transmitter. The event may be
either device-related or process-related. Operator action is strongly recommended.
Function Check Configuration change or device testing. No fault actions are performed. The operator
may need to complete a procedure.
•
Out of
Specification
The process is outside user-specified limits or device limits. No fault actions are
performed. The operator should check the process.
Maintenance
Required
Device maintenance is recommended, either near-term or mid-term.
To ignore an alert:
a) Choose Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup.
b) Choose the category of the alert: Sensor, Configuration, Process, or Output.
c) Select the alert.
d) Set the severity to No Effect.
If an alert is ignored, any occurrence of this alert is not posted to the alert list and the status LED on the
transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
•
To ignore a condition:
a) Choose Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup.
b) Choose the category of the alert: Sensor, Configuration, Process, or Output.
c) Select the alert.
d) Choose Set Conditions.
e) Select the condition and set it to OFF.
If a condition is ignored, any occurrence of this condition is not posted to the alert list and the status LED
on the transmitter does not change color. The occurrence is posted to alert history.
7.2.4 Configure Fault Timeout
Display
Menu → Configuration → Alert Setup → Output Fault Actions → Fault Timeout (sec)
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Fault Processing → Fault Timeout
Field communicator
Device Settings → Alerts → Alert Setup → Output Fault Action → General → Fault Timeout
Fault Timeout controls the delay before fault actions are performed.
The fault timeout period begins when the transmitter detects an alert condition.
•
During the fault timeout period, the transmitter continues to report its last valid measurements.
•
If the fault timeout period expires while the alert is still active, the fault actions are performed.
•
If the alert condition clears before the fault timeout expires, no fault actions are performed.
Restriction
• Fault Timeout is not applied to all alerts. For some alerts, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert
condition is detected. See the list of alerts and conditions for details.
•
Fault Timeout is applicable only when Alert Severity = Failure. For all other settings of Alert Severity, Fault
Timeout is irrelevant.
Configuration and Use Manual
91
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Procedure
Set Fault Timeout as desired.
•
Default: 0 seconds
•
Range: 0 to 60 seconds
If you set Fault Timeout to 0, fault actions are performed as soon as the alert condition is detected.
7.2.5 Alerts, conditions, and configuration options
For more information on these alerts, see Status alerts, causes, and recommendations.
Configuration Error
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-2: Configuration Error conditions
Name
Ignorable
[020] Calibration Factors Missing
No
[021] Incorrect Sensor Type
Yes
[030] Incorrect Board Type
No
Core Processor Update Failed
Yes
Password Not Set
No
Time Not Entered
Yes
Batcher Not Configured
Yes
[120] Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
No
Core Low Power
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-3: Core Low Power conditions
Name
Ignorable
[031] Low Power
No
Configuration Warning
Default severity: Maintenance Required
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-4: Configuration Warning conditions
Name
Ignorable
No Permanent License
No
Clock Failure
No
92
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Table 7-4: Configuration Warning conditions (continued)
Name
Ignorable
Transmitter Software Update Failed
Yes
Drive Over Range
Default severity: Maintenance
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-5: Drive Over-Range conditions
Name
Ignorable
[102] Drive Overrange
Yes
Electronics Failed
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-6: Electronics Failed conditions
Name
Ignorable
[018] EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
No
[019] RAM Error (Transmitter)
No
Watchdog Error
No
Event Active
Default severity: Out of Speculation
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-7: Event Active conditions
Name
Ignorable
Enhanced Event [1 - 5] Active
Yes
Event [1 - 2] Active
Yes
Extreme Primary Purpose Variable
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-8: Extreme Primary Purpose Variable conditions
Name
Ignorable
[005] Mass Flow Rate Overrange
No
[008] Density Overrange
No
Configuration and Use Manual
93
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Default severity: Maintenance Required
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-9: Function Check Failed or Smart Meter Verification Aborted conditions
Name
Ignorable
[010] Calibration Failed
No
[034] Smart Meter Verification Failed
Yes
[035] Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Yes
Function Check in Progress
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-10: Function Check in Progress conditions
Name
Ignorable
[104] Calibration in Progress
No
[131] Smart Meter Verification in Progress
Yes
Output Fixed
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-11: Output Fixed conditions
Name
Ignorable
[111] Frequency Output Fixed
No
[118] Discrete Output Fixed
No
[101] mA Output Fixed
No
Output Saturated
Default severity: Out of Speculation
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-12: Output Saturated conditions
Name
Ignorable
[100] mA Output Saturated
Yes
[110] Frequency Output Saturated
Yes
Process Aberration
Default severity: Out of Speculation
94
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-13: Process Aberration conditions
Name
Ignorable
[105] Two-Phase Flow
Yes
[115] External Input Error
Yes
[116] Temperature Overrange (API Referral)
Yes
[117] Density Overrange (API Referral)
Yes
[121] Extrapolation Alert (Concentration)
Yes
[123] Pressure Overrange (API Referral)
Yes
Batch Time Out
Yes
Moderate Two-Phase Flow
Yes
Severe Two-Phase Flow
Yes
Security Breach
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Sensor Being Simulated
Default severity: Function Check
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-14: Sensor Being Simulated conditions
Name
Ignorable
[132] Sensor Simulation Active
No
Sensor Failed
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-15: Sensor Failed conditions
Name
Ignorable
[003] Sensor Failed
No
[016] Sensor Temperature (RTD) Failure
No
[017] Sensor Case Temperature (RTD) Failure
No
Sensor-Transmitter Communication Error
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Configuration and Use Manual
95
Configure device options and preferences
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 7-16: Sensor-Transmitter Communication Error conditions
Name
Ignorable
[026] Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
No
[028] Core Process Write Failure
No
Transmitter Initializing
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: No
Fault Timeout applicable: No
Table 7-17: Transmitter Initializing conditions
Name
Ignorable
[009] Transmitter Initializing/Warming Up
No
Tube Not Full
Default severity: Failure
Severity configurable: Yes
Fault Timeout applicable: Yes
Table 7-18: Tube Not Full conditions
Name
Ignorable
[033] Insufficient Pickoff Signal
Yes
96
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
8 Integrate the meter with the control
system
8.1 Channel configuration
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel x
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel x
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Channels
8.2 Configure I/O Channel A
Channel A is ordered as mA/HART® or Modbus® RTU. Channel A cannot be changed after initial order.
Signal
Channel A
Channel options
mA/ HART(1)
Modbus RTU(2)
(1) If ordered with Hardware board code A.
(2) If ordered with Hardware board code M.
8.3 Configure I/O Channel B
Channel B is a configurable I/O channel.
Channel B can be used for any of the following outputs:
•
Frequency Output
•
Discrete Output
Prerequisites
Important
To avoid causing process errors:
•
The channel configuration must match the I/O wiring.
•
Before changing the channel configuration, ensure that all control loops affected by the channel are under
manual control.
Procedure
1. Set Channel Type as desired.
2. Power Source is Passive only.
Option
Description
External (Passive)
The channel is powered by an external power source.
Configuration and Use Manual
97
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Postrequisites
Perform or verify the corresponding output or input configuration. When the configuration of a channel is
changed, the channel's behavior will be controlled by the configuration that is stored for the selected input or
output type, and the stored configuration may not be appropriate for your process.
After verifying channel and output configuration, return the control loop to automatic control.
8.4 Configure an mA Output
Use an mA Output to report current values of process variables. The mA signal varies between 4 mA and
20 mA in proportion to the current value of the assigned process variable.
mA Output is only available if transmitter is ordered with Hardware Board code A.
8.4.1 Configure mA Output Source
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → I/O Settings → Source
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → mA Output
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x
mA Output Source specifies the process variable that is reported by the mA Output.
Prerequisites
•
If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as
desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
•
If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, API Referral,
or Advance Phase Measurement process variable, ensure that the concentration measurement application,
API Referral, or Advance Phase Measurement application respectively, is configured so that the desired
variable is available.
Procedure
Set mA Output Process Variable as desired.
Default: Mass Flow Rate
Postrequisites
If you change the configuration of mA Output Source, verify the settings of Lower Range Value and Upper
Range Value. The transmitter automatically loads a set of values, and these values may not be appropriate for
your application.
Options for mA Output Source
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for mA Output Source, plus several application-specific options.
Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Process variable
Label
Display
ProLink III
Mass flow rate
Mass Flow Rate
Mass Flow Rate
Volume flow rate
Volume Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas standard volume flow rate
GSV Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Standard
98
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Label
Process variable
Display
ProLink III
Density
Density
Density
External pressure
External Pressure
External Pressure
External temperature
External Temperature
External Temperature
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Two-phase flow detection
Phase
Phase Flow Severity
Drive gain
Drive Gain
Drive Gain
Temperature-corrected density
Referred Density
Density at Reference Temperature
Temperature-corrected (standard)
volume flow rate
Referred Volume Flow
Volume Flow Rate at Reference
Temperature
Diagnostics
API Referral
Average temperature-corrected density Average Line Density
Average Density
Average temperature
Average Temperature
Average Temperature
Density at reference
Referred Density
Density at Reference Temperature
Specific gravity
Specific Gravity
Density (Fixed SG Units)
Standard volume flow rate
Standard Vol Flow
Volume Flow Rate at Reference
Temperature
Net mass flow rate
Net Mass Flow
Net Mass Flow Rate
Net volume flow rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
Baume
Baume
Baume
Concentration measurement
8.4.2 Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value
(URV) for an mA Output
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Lower Range Value
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Upper Range Value
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Lower Range Value
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Upper Range Value
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Settings → Lower Range Value
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Settings → Upper Range Value
The Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) are used to scale an mA Output, that is, to define
the relationship between mA Output Process Variable and the mA Output signal.
LRV is the value of mA Output Source represented by an output of 4 mA. URV is the value of mA Output
Source represented by an output of 20 mA. Between LRV and URV, an mA Output is linear with the process
variable. If the process variable drops below LRV or rises above URV, the transmitter posts an output
saturation alert.
Configuration and Use Manual
99
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Procedure
Set LRV and URV as desired.
Enter LRV and URV in the measurement units used for mA Output Source.
•
Defaults: Specific to each process variable
•
Range: Unlimited
Note
You can set URV below LRV. For example, you can set URV to 50 and LRV to 100. If you do this, an mA Output
will be inversely proportional to the value of mA Output Source.
8.4.3 Configure mA Output Direction
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Direction
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Direction
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Direction
mA Output Direction controls how conditions of forward flow and reverse flow affect the flow rates reported
by an mA Output.
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the
transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Table 8-1: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and
totalizers
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow
on sensor)
With Arrow
Forward
Against Arrow
Reverse
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on
sensor)
With Arrow
Reverse
Against Arrow
Forward
Actual flow direction
Procedure
Set mA Output Direction as desired.
Option
Description
Normal (default) Appropriate when your application needs to distinguish between forward flow and reverse
flow.
Absolute Value
Appropriate when your application does not need to distinguish between forward flow and
reverse flow.
Important
mA Output Direction interacts with Lower Range Value (LRV). The effect of mA Output Direction on an mA
Output varies, depending on whether LRV < 0 or LRV ≥ 0.
Related information
Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
100
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output
mA Output Direction affects how the transmitter reports flow values via an mA Output. An mA Output is
affected by mA Output Direction only if mA Output Source is set to a flow variable.
The effect of mA Output Direction depends on the setting of Lower Range Value (LRV).
•
If Lower Range Value = 0, see Figure 8-1.
•
If Lower Range Value > 0, see Figure 8-1 and adapt the chart.
•
If Lower Range Value < 0, see Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-1: Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output: Lower Range Value = 0
•
Lower Range Value = 0
•
Upper Range Value = x
Configuration and Use Manual
101
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Figure 8-2: Effect of mA Output Direction on an mA Output: Lower Range Value < 0
mA Output Direction = Absolute Value
20
20
12
12
mA output
mA output
mA Output Direction = Normal
4
-x
0
Reverse flow
•
Lower Range Value = −x
•
Upper Range Value = x
4
x
Forward flow
-x
Reverse flow
0
x
Forward flow
Example: mA Output Direction = Normal and Lower Range Value = 0
Configuration:
•
mA Output Direction = Normal (default)
•
Lower Range Value = 0 g/sec
•
Upper Range Value = 100 g/sec
Result:
•
Under conditions of reverse flow or zero flow, an mA Output is 4 mA.
•
Under conditions of forward flow, up to a flow rate of 100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between 4 mA and
20 mA in proportion to the flow rate.
•
Under conditions of forward flow, if the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an mA Output will be
proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
102
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Example: mA Output Direction = Normal and Lower Range Value < 0
Configuration:
•
mA Output Direction = Normal
•
Lower Range Value = −100 g/sec
•
Upper Range Value = +100 g/sec
Result:
•
Under conditions of zero flow, an mA Output is 12 mA.
•
Under conditions of forward flow, for flow rates between 0 and +100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between
12 mA and 20 mA in proportion to (the absolute value of) the flow rate.
•
Under conditions of forward flow, if (the absolute value of) the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an
mA Output is proportional to the flow rate up to 20.5 mA, and will be level at 20.5 mA at higher flow rates.
•
Under conditions of reverse flow, for flow rates between 0 and −100 g/sec, an mA Output varies between
4 mA and 12 mA in inverse proportion to the absolute value of the flow rate.
•
Under conditions of reverse flow, if the absolute value of the flow rate equals or exceeds 100 g/sec, an
mA Output is inversely proportional to the flow rate down to 3.8 mA, and will be level at 3.8 mA at higher
absolute values.
8.4.4 Configure mA Output Cutoff
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → MAO Cutoff
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output x → Flow Rate Cutoff
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Settings → mA Output Flow Rate
Cutoff
mA Output Cutoff specifies the lowest flow rate that will be reported through an mA Output. All flow rates
below the specified value are reported as 0.
mA Output Cutoff is applicable only when mA Output Source is set to a flow rate variable. It is applied to
whatever flow variable is assigned to an mA Output.
Procedure
Set mA Output Cutoff as desired.
Set mA Output Cutoff in the measurement units used for the process variable. If you change the
measurement unit, mA Output Cutoff is adjusted automatically.
•
Default: 0
•
Range: 0 or any positive value
Tip
For most applications, the default value of mA Output Cutoff should be used. Contact customer service before
changing mA Output Cutoff.
Configuration and Use Manual
103
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Interaction between mA Output Cutoff and process variable cutoffs
When mA Output Process Variable is set to a flow variable (for example, mass flow rate or volume flow rate),
mA Output Cutoff interacts with Mass Flow Cutoff or Volume Flow Cutoff. The transmitter puts the cutoff into
effect at the highest flow rate at which a cutoff is applicable.
8.4.5 Configure mA Output Damping
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → MAO Damping
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output → Added Damping
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Settings → Added Damping
mA Output Damping controls the amount of damping that will be applied to the mA Output.
Damping is used to smooth out small, rapid fluctuations in process measurement. The damping value
specifies the time period, in seconds, over which the transmitter will spread changes in the process variable.
At the end of the interval, the value reported by an mA Output will reflect 63% of the change in the actual
measured value.
mA Output Damping affects a process variable only when it is reported via the mA Output. If the process
variable is read from the display or digitally, mA Output Damping is not applied. For most applications, leaving
the mA Output Damping at 0.0 seconds should suffice. Change the Process Variable Damping first.
Procedure
Set mA Output Damping to the desired value.
•
Default: 0.0 seconds
•
Range: 0.0 to 440 seconds
Tip
• A high damping value makes the process variable appear smoother because the reported value changes
slowly.
•
A low damping value makes the process variable appear more erratic because the reported value changes
more quickly.
•
The combination of a high damping value and rapid, large changes in the process variable assigned to an
mA Output can result in increased measurement error.
•
Whenever the damping value is non-zero, the damped value will lag the actual measurement because the
damped value is being averaged over time.
•
In general, lower damping values are preferable because there is less chance of data loss, and less lag time
between the actual measurement and the damped value.
Interaction between mA Output Damping and process variable damping
When mA Output Source is set to a flow rate variable, density, or temperature, mA Output Damping
interacts with Flow Damping, Density Damping, or Temperature Damping. If multiple damping parameters
are applicable, the effect of damping the process variable is calculated first, and the mA Output damping
calculation is applied to the result of that calculation.
Example: Damping interaction
Configuration:
•
Flow Damping = 1 second
•
mA Output Source = Mass Flow Rate
104
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
mA Output Damping = 2 seconds
Result: A change in the mass flow rate will be reflected in the mA Output over a time period that is greater
than 3 seconds. The exact time period is calculated by the transmitter according to internal algorithms which
are not configurable.
8.4.6 Configure mA Output Fault Action
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → mA Output x → Fault Action
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → mA Output x → mAO x Fault Settings
mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter detects a fault condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other
option, the fault action is not implemented.
•
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the
fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set mA Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: Downscale
Important
If you set mA Output Fault Action to None, the mA Output will be controlled by the setting of Process
Variable Fault Action. In most cases, if you set mA Output Fault Action to None, you should also set
Process Variable Fault Action to None.
2. If you set mA Output Fault Action to Upscale or Downscale, set mA Output Fault Level to the signal
that the mA Output will produce during a fault.
Options for mAO Fault Action and mAO Fault Level
Option
mA Output behavior
mA Output Fault Level
Upscale
Goes to the configured fault level
Default: 22.0 mA
Range: 21.0 to 23.0 mA
Downscale (default)
Goes to the configured fault level
Default: 2.0 mA
Range: 1.0 to 3.6 mA
Internal Zero
Goes to the mA Output level associated with a
process variable value of 0 (zero), as determined
by Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
settings
Not applicable
None
Determined by the setting of Process Variable
Fault Action
Not applicable
Configuration and Use Manual
105
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
8.5 Configure a Frequency Output
Use a Frequency Output to report current values of process variables. The frequency varies between 0 Hz and
12500 Hz in proportion to the current value of the assigned process variable. Maximum fault level is 14500 Hz.
8.5.1 Configure Frequency Output Source
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Type → Frequency Output
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → Frequency Output
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Channels → Channel B
Frequency Output Source specifies the process variable that is reported by the Frequency Output.
Prerequisites
•
If you plan to configure the output to report volume flow, ensure that you have set Volume Flow Type as
desired: Liquid or Gas Standard Volume.
•
If you plan to configure an output to report a concentration measurement process variable, ensure that
the concentration measurement application is configured so that the desired variable is available.
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Source as desired.
Postrequisites
If you change the configuration of Frequency Output Source, verify the Frequency Output scaling. The
transmitter automatically loads the most recent values for the scaling parameters, and they may not be
appropriate for your application.
Related information
Configure Frequency Output Scaling
Options for Frequency Output Source
The transmitter provides a basic set of options for Frequency Output Source, plus several application-specific
options. Different communications tools may use different labels for the options.
Process variable
Label
Display
PLIII
Mass flow rate
Mass Flow Rate
Mass Flow Rate
Volume flow rate
Volume Flow Rate
Volume Flow Rate
Gas standard volume flow rate
GSV Flow Rate
Gas Standard Volume Flow Rate
Referred Volume Flow
Volume Flow Rate at Reference
Temperature
Standard volume flow rate
Standard Vol Flow
Volume Flow Rate at Reference
Temperature
Net mass flow rate
Net Mass Flow
Net Mass Flow Rate
Standard
API Referral
Temperature-corrected (standard)
volume flow rate
Concentration measurement
106
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Label
Process variable
Net volume flow rate
Display
PLIII
Net Volume Flow Rate
Net Volume Flow Rate
8.5.2 Configure Frequency Output Scaling
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Scaling Method
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output → Scaling Method
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output x → FO x Scaling
Frequency output scaling defines the relationship between Frequency Output Source and the pulse of the
Frequency Output. Scale the Frequency Output to provide the data in the form required by your frequency
receiving device.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Scaling Method.
Option
Description
Frequency=Flow (default)
Frequency calculated from flow rate
Pulses/Unit
A user-specified number of pulses represents one flow unit
Units/Pulse
A pulse represents a user-specified number of flow units
2. Set additional required parameters.
• If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Frequency=Flow, set Rate Factor and Frequency
Factor.
•
If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Pulses/Unit, define the number of pulses that will
represent one flow unit.
•
If you set Frequency Output Scaling Method to Units/Pulse, define the number of units that each
pulse will indicate.
Calculate frequency from flow rate
The Frequency=Flow option is used to customize the Frequency Output for your application when you do not
know appropriate values for Units/Pulse or Pulses/Unit.
If you specify Frequency=Flow, you must provide values for Rate Factor and Frequency Factor:
Rate Factor
The maximum flow rate that you want the Frequency Output to report.
Frequency Factor A value calculated as follows:
where:
FrequencyFactor RateFactor × N
T
T
Factor to convert selected time base to seconds
N
Number of pulses per flow unit, as configured in the receiving device
The resulting Frequency Factor must be within the range of the Frequency Output :
•
If Frequency Factor is less than 1 Hz, reconfigure the receiving device for a higher pulses/unit setting.
Configuration and Use Manual
107
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Example: Configure Frequency=Flow
You want the Frequency Output to report all flow rates up to 2000 kg/min.
The frequency receiving device is configured for 10 pulses/kg.
Solution:
FrequencyFactor RateFactor × N
T
Set parameters as follows:
•
Rate Factor: 2000
•
Frequency Factor: 333.33
FrequencyFactor 2000 × 10
60
FrequencyFactor = 333.33
8.5.3 Configure Frequency Output Direction
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel x → I/O Settings → Direction
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output → Direction
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output x → FO x Direction
Frequency Output Direction controls how conditions of forward flow and reverse flow affect the flow rates
reported by the Frequency Output.
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the
transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Table 8-2: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and
totalizers
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow
on sensor)
With Arrow
Forward
Against Arrow
Reverse
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on
sensor)
With Arrow
Reverse
Against Arrow
Forward
Actual flow direction
Procedure
Set Frequency Output Direction as desired.
Option
Description
Positive Flow Only
•
Forward flow: The Frequency Output reports the flow rate according to the
configured scaling method.
•
Reverse flow: The Frequency Output is 0 Hz.
•
Forward flow: The Frequency Output is 0 Hz.
•
Reverse flow: The Frequency Output reports the absolute value of the flow rate
according to the configured scaling method.
Negative Flow
Only
108
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Option
Description
Both Positive and
Negative Flow
The Frequency Output reports the absolute value of the flow rate according to the
configured scaling method. It is not possible to distinguish between forward flow
and reverse flow from the Frequency Output alone. This setting is typically used in
combination with a discrete output configured to report flow direction.
Related information
Configure Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Configure Discrete Output Source
8.5.4 Configure Frequency Output Fault Action
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Frequency Output x → Fault Action
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Frequency Output x → FO Mode
Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter detects a fault
condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other
option, the fault action is not implemented.
•
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the
fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
Procedure
1. Set Frequency Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: Downscale
Important
If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to None, the Frequency Output will be controlled by the
setting of Process Variable Fault Action. In most cases, if you set Frequency Output Fault Action to
None, you should also set Process Variable Fault Action to None.
2. If you set Frequency Output Fault Action to Upscale, set Frequency Fault Level to the desired value.
•
Default: 14500 Hz
•
Range: 10 Hz to 14500 Hz
Related information
Configure Process Variable Fault Action
Options for Frequency Output Fault Action
Label
Frequency Output behavior
Upscale
Goes to configured Upscale value:
• Default: 14500 Hz
•
Downscale
Configuration and Use Manual
Range: 10 Hz to 14500 Hz
0 Hz
109
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Label
Frequency Output behavior
Internal Zero
0 Hz
None (default)
Determined by the setting of Process Variable Fault Action
8.6 Configure a Discrete Output
Use a Discrete Output to report specific meter or process conditions.
8.6.1 Configure Discrete Output Source
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Source
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Channels → Channel B → Discrete Output
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Mapping Source → Output Source → DO x Source
Discrete Output Source specifies the process condition or device condition that is reported by a Discrete
Output.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Source to the desired option.
Default: Forward/Reverse
Postrequisites
If you set Discrete Output Source to Flow Switch, additional configuration is required.
Related information
Configure Flow Rate Switch
Options for Discrete Output Source
Option
Label
State
Discrete Output voltage
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
Forward Reverse
Indicator
Forward flow
0 V
Reverse flow
Externally powered: Site-specific
Calibration in
Progress
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
Fault Indication
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
Display
Prolink III
Enhanced Event 1–
5 (1)
Basic Event x
Enhanced Event x
Event 1–2 (2)
Enhanced Event x
Flow Rate Switch
Flow Rate Switch
Forward/Reverse
Indicator
Flow Direction
Calibration in
Progress
Zero in Progress
Fault
Fault
110
Event x
Flow Switch
Indicator
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Option
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Label
State
Discrete Output voltage
Meter Verification
Failure(3)
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
Batch Primary Valve
ON
Externally powered: Site-specific
OFF
0 V
Display
Prolink III
Smart Meter
Verification
Smart Meter
Verification
Batch Primary Valve
Batch Primary Valve
(1) Events configured using the enhanced event model.
(2) Events configured using the basic event model.
(3) The ProLink III v5.0 option is “Meter Verification Failure” for the Discrete Output Source field. This does
match the table entry.
Important
This table assumes that Discrete Output Polarity is set to Active High. If Discrete Output Polarity is set to
Active Low, reverse the voltage values.
Important
Actual flow direction interacts with Sensor Flow Direction Arrow to determine the flow direction that the
transmitter uses in processing. See the following table.
Table 8-3: Interaction between actual flow direction and Sensor Flow Direction Arrow
Setting of Sensor Flow Direction
Arrow
Flow direction sent to outputs and
totalizers
Forward (same direction as Flow arrow
on sensor)
With Arrow
Forward
Against Arrow
Reverse
Reverse (opposite from Flow arrow on
sensor)
With Arrow
Reverse
Against Arrow
Forward
Actual flow direction
8.6.2 Configure Discrete Output Polarity
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Polarity
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Polarity
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output x → Discrete Output x → Polarity
A Discrete Output has two states: ON (active, asserted) and OFF (inactive). Two different voltages are used to
represent these states. Discrete Output Polarity controls which voltage represents which state.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Polarity as desired.
Default: Active High
8.6.3 Configure Discrete Output Fault Action
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel B → I/O Settings → Fault Action
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → I/O → Outputs → Discrete Output → Fault Action
Field communicator
Process Variables → Inputs/Outputs → Discrete Output x → Discrete Output x → Fault Action
Configuration and Use Manual
111
Integrate the meter with the control system
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Discrete Output Fault Action controls the behavior of a Discrete Output if the transmitter detects a fault
condition.
Important
• The fault action is implemented only if Alert Severity is set to Failure. If Alert Severity is set to any other
option, the fault action is not implemented.
•
For some faults only: If Fault Timeout is set to a non-zero value, the transmitter will not implement the
fault action until the timeout has elapsed.
NOTICE
Do not use Discrete Output Source as a fault indicator. If you do, you may not be able to distinguish a fault
condition from a normal operating condition. If you want to use the Discrete Output as a fault indicator, see
Fault indication with a Discrete Output.
Procedure
Set Discrete Output Fault Action as desired.
Default: None
Related information
Interaction between Process Variable Fault Action and other fault actions
Options for Discrete Output Fault Action
Label
Upscale
Downscale
None (default)
Discrete Output behavior
Polarity=Active High
Polarity=Active Low
•
Fault: Discrete Output is ON (site-specific
voltage)
•
Fault: Discrete Output is OFF (0 V)
•
No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by
its assignment
•
No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by
its assignment
•
Fault: Discrete Output is OFF (0 V)
•
•
No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by
its assignment
•
Fault: Discrete Output is ON (site-specific
voltage)
No fault: Discrete Output is controlled by
its assignment
Discrete Output is controlled by its assignment
Fault indication with a Discrete Output
To indicate faults via a Discrete Output, set Discrete Output Source to Fault. Then, if a fault occurs, the
Discrete Output is always ON and the setting of Discrete Output Fault Action is ignored.
112
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure digital communications
May 2024
9 Configure digital communications
9.1 Configure HART® communications
9.1.1 Configure basic HART parameters
Display
Menu → Configuration → Time/Date/Tag
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART)
Field communicator
Device Settings → Communications → HART → Communication Settings → Configure
Communication → Device
Basic HART parameters include the HART address, HART tags, and the operation of the primary mA output.
This applies to transmitters ordered with Hardware Board code A.
Procedure
1. Set HART Address to a value that is unique on your network.
•
Default: 0
•
Range: 0 to 63
Tip
• The default address is typically used unless you are a multidrop environment.
•
Devices using HART protocol to communicate with the transmitter may use either HART Address,
HART Tag, or HART Long Tag to identify the transmitter. Configure any or all, as required by your
other HART devices.
2. Set HART Tag to a value that is unique on your network.
3. Set HART Long Tag to a value that is unique on your network.
HART Long Tag is supported only by HART 7. If you are using HART 5, you cannot use HART Long Tag to
communicate with the transmitter.
4. Ensure that mA Output Action is configured appropriately.
Option
Description
Enabled (Live)
The primary mA output reports process data as configured. This is the
appropriate setting for most applications.
Disabled (Fixed)
The primary mA output is fixed at 4 mA and does not report process
data.
Important
If you use ProLink III to set HART Address to 0, the program automatically enables mA Output Action.
If you use ProLink III to set HART Address to any other value, the program automatically disables mA
Output Action. This is designed to make it easier to configure the transmitter for legacy behavior.
Always verify mA Output Action after setting HART Address.
Configuration and Use Manual
113
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure HART® variables (PV, SV, TV, QV)
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel A → HART Settings → HART Variables
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART) → Variable
Assignment
Field communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Mapping/Source → Variable Mapping
The HART variables are a set of four variables predefined for HART use. The HART variables include the
Primary Variable (PV), Secondary Variable (SV), Tertiary Variable (TV), and Quaternary Variable (QV). You can
assign specific process variables to the HART variables, and then use standard HART methods to read or
broadcast the assigned process data.
The default HART variables are as follows:
PV
Mass Flow
SV
Density
TV
Volume Flow
QV
Temperature
Note
The Tertiary Variable and Quaternary Variable are also called the Third Variable (TV) and Fourth Variable (FV).
Restriction
The Primary Variable is always the process variable assigned to mA Output 1. If you change either of these
assignments, the other is changed automatically.
The Secondary Variable and Tertiary Variable are not tied to any outputs. This is different from previous
Micro Motion Coriolis transmitters.
Procedure
Assign variables to the PV, SV, TV, and QV as desired.
Options for HART variables
Process variable
PV
SV
TV
QV
Mass flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Gas standard volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Temperature
✓
✓
✓
✓
Density
✓
✓
✓
✓
External pressure
✓
✓
✓
✓
External temperature
✓
✓
✓
✓
Current value of any totalizer
✓
✓
✓
Current value of any inventory
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Standard
Totalizers and inventories
Diagnostics
Velocity
114
✓
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Process variable
PV
SV
TV
QV
Drive gain
✓
✓
✓
✓
Tube frequency
✓
✓
✓
Meter temperature
✓
✓
✓
Board temperature
✓
✓
✓
Inlet (LPO) amplitude
✓
✓
✓
Outlet (RPO) amplitude
✓
✓
✓
Live zero
✓
✓
✓
PV loop current
✓
✓
✓
% of range
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Temperature-corrected density
✓
✓
✓
✓
Temperature-corrected (standard)
volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Average temperature-corrected density
✓
✓
✓
✓
Average temperature
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Two-phase flow severity
API referral
CTPL
Concentration measurement
Density at reference
✓
✓
✓
✓
Specific gravity
✓
✓
✓
✓
Standard volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Net mass flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Net volume flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Concentration
✓
✓
✓
✓
Configure burst communications
Burst mode is a mode of communication during which the transmitter regularly broadcasts HART® digital
information to the network via the primary mA output. As a general rule, Burst mode should only be enabled if
a triloop is being used.
Configure HART burst messages
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel A → HART Settings → Burst Message x
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART) → Burst Mode
Field communicator
Device Settings → Communication → HART → Burst Configuration → Configure Burst Message
Burst messages contain information on process variables or transmitter status. You can configure up to three
burst messages. Each message can contain different information. Burst messages also provide the mechanism
for trigger mode and event notification.
Procedure
1. Navigate to the burst message you want to configure.
Configuration and Use Manual
115
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2. Enable the burst message.
3. Set Burst Option to the desired content.
Table 9-1: Options for burst message contents
HART
command
Label
Description
ProLink III
Field communicator
1
Source (Primary Variable)
Primary Variable
The transmitter sends the primary variable (PV) in
the configured measurement units in each burst
message (e.g., 14.0 g/sec, 13.5 g/sec, 12.0 g/sec).
2
Primary Variable (Percent
Range/Current)
Pct Range/Current
The transmitter sends the PV’s actual mA level and
the PV’s percent of range in each burst message (e.g.,
11.0 mA 25%).
3
Process Variables/Current Process Vars/Current
The transmitter sends the PV’s actual milliamp
reading and the PV, SV, TV, and QV values in
measurement units in each burst message (e.g.,
11.8 mA, 50 g/sec, 23 °C, 50 g/sec, 0.0023 g/cm3).
9
Read Device Variables
with Status
Device Variables with
Status
The transmitter sends up to eight user-specified
process variables in each burst message.
33
Transmitter Variables
Field Device Vars
The transmitter sends four user-specified process
variables in each burst message.
48
Read Additional
Transmitter Status
Read Additional Device
Status
The transmitter sends expanded device status
information in each burst message.
4. Depending on your choice, select the four or eight user-specified variables for the burst message, or set
the HART variables as desired.
Configure HART trigger mode
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel A → HART Settings → Burst Message x →
Trigger Mode
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (HART) → Trigger Mode
Field communicator
Device Settings → Communication → HART → Burst Configuration → View Message x →
Configure Update Rate
Trigger mode uses the burst message mechanism to indicate that a process variable has changed. When
trigger mode is implemented, the bursting interval (HART update rate) changes if Primary Variable or
Burst Variable 0 moves above or below the user-specified trigger level. You can set up a different trigger
on each burst message.
Prerequisites
Before you can configure trigger mode, the corresponding HART burst message must be enabled.
Procedure
1. Select the burst message for which you will set up trigger mode.
2. Set Trigger Mode to the type of trigger you want to use.
Option
Description
Continuous The burst message is sent at Default Update Rate. The burst interval is not affected by
changes in process variables.
116
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Option
Description
Falling
•
When the specified process variable is above Trigger Level, the burst message is sent
at Default Update Rate.
•
When the specified process variable is below Trigger Level, the burst message is sent
at Update Rate.
•
When the specified process variable is below Trigger Level, the burst message is sent
at Default Update Rate.
•
When the specified process variable is above Trigger Level, the burst message is sent
at Update Rate.
Rising
Windowed
This option is used to communicate that the process variable is changing rapidly. Trigger
Level defines a deadband around the most recently broadcast value.
• If the process variable stays within this deadband, the burst message is sent at
Default Update Rate.
•
On Change •
•
If the process variable moves outside this deadband in either direction, the burst
message is sent at Update Rate.
If any value in the burst message changes, the burst message is sent at Update Rate.
If no values change, the burst message is sent at Default Update Rate.
3. Set Trigger Level to the value of the process variable at which the trigger will be activated.
4. Set Default Update Rate (or Base Burst Rate) to the burst interval to be used when the trigger is not
active.
5. Set Update Rate (or Triggered Burst Rate) to the burst interval to be used when the trigger is active.
9.2 Configure Modbus communications
Display
Menu → Configuration → Inputs/Outputs → Channel A
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Communications → Communications (Modbus)
Field Communicator
Device Settings → Inputs/Outputs → Channels → Channel A
Modbus communications parameters control Modbus communications with the transmitter.
This applies to transmitters ordered with hardware board code M.
Restriction
If you need to configure all Modbus parameters, you must use ProLink III. The display does not provide access
to Modbus ASCII Support or Additional Communications Response Delay. The Field Communicator provides
access only to Modbus Address.
Modbus support is implemented on the RS-485 physical layer via Channel A.
Important
Your device automatically accepts all connection requests within the following ranges:
•
Protocol: Modbus RTU (8-bit) or Modbus ASCII (7-bit) unless Modbus ASCII Support is disabled
•
Parity: none, odd, or even
•
Stop bits: 1 or 2
•
Baud: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
Configuration and Use Manual
117
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
You do not need to configure these communications parameters on the device.
Procedure
1. Enable or disable Modbus ASCII Support as desired.
The setting of this parameter controls the range of valid Modbus addresses for your device.
Modbus ASCII support
Available Modbus addresses
Disabled
1–127
Enabled
1–15, 32–47, 64–79, and 96–110
2. Set Modbus Address to a unique value on the network. Default Modbus address is 1.
3. Set Floating-Point Byte Order to match the byte order used by your Modbus host.
Code
Byte order
0
1–2
3–4
1
3–4
1–2
2
2–1
4–3
3
4–3
2–1
Note
The default byte order is 1.
See the following table for the bit structure of bytes 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Table 9-2: Bit structure of floating-point bytes
Byte
Bits
Definition
1
SEEEEEEE
S=Sign
E=Exponent
2
EMMMMMMM
E=Exponent
M=Mantissa
3–4
MMMMMMMM
M=Mantissa
4. Set Double-Precision Byte Order to match the byte order used by your Modbus host.
118
Code
Byte order
0
1–2–3–4
5–6–7–8
1
3–4–1–2
7–8–5–6
2
2–1–4–3
6–5–8–7
3
4–3–2–1
8–7–6–5
4
5–6–7–8
1–2–3–4
5
7–8–5–6
3–4–1–2
6
6–5–8–7
2–1–4–3
7
8–7–6–5
4–3–2–1
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure digital communications
May 2024
Note
The default byte order is 1.
See the following table for the bit structure of bytes 1–8.
Table 9-3: Bit structure of double-precision bytes
Byte
Bits
Definition
1
SEEEEEEE
S=Sign
E=Exponent
2
EEEEMMMM
E=Exponent
M=Mantissa
3–8
MMMMMMMM
M=Mantissa
5. Optional: Set Additional Communications Response Delay in delay units.
A delay unit is ⅔ of the time required to transmit one character, as calculated for the port currently in
use and the character transmission parameters.
Additional Communications Response Delay is used to synchronize Modbus communications with
hosts that operate at a slower speed than the device. The value specified here will be added to each
response the device sends to the host.
•
Default: 0
•
Range: 0 to 255
Tip
Do not set Additional Communications Response Delay unless required by your Modbus host.
Configuration and Use Manual
119
Configure digital communications
May 2024
120
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Complete the configuration
May 2024
10 Complete the configuration
10.1 Test or tune the system using sensor simulation
Display
Menu → Service Tools → Sensor Simulation → Simulate Sensor
ProLink III
Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Sensor Simulation
Field communicator
Diagnostics → Simulation → Simulate Sensor
Use sensor simulation to test the system's response to a variety of process conditions, including boundary
conditions, problem conditions, or alert conditions, or to tune the loop.
Restriction
Sensor simulation is available only on flow meters with the enhanced core processor.
Prerequisites
Before enabling sensor simulation, ensure that your process can tolerate the effects of the simulated process
values.
Procedure
1. Enable sensor simulation.
2. For mass flow, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Required values
Fixed
Fixed Value
Sawtooth
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Sine
Period
Minimum
Maximum
3. For density, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Required values
Fixed
Fixed Value
Sawtooth
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Sine
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Configuration and Use Manual
121
Complete the configuration
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4. For temperature, set Wave Form as desired and enter the required values.
Option
Required values
Fixed
Fixed Value
Sawtooth
Period
Minimum
Maximum
Sine
Period
Minimum
Maximum
5. Observe the system response to the simulated values and make any appropriate changes to the
transmitter configuration or to the system.
6. Modify the simulated values and repeat.
7. When you have finished testing or tuning, disable sensor simulation.
10.1.1 Sensor simulation
Sensor simulation allows you to test the system or tune the loop without having to create the test conditions in
your process. When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports the simulated values for mass flow,
density, and temperature, and takes all appropriate actions. For example, the transmitter might apply a cutoff,
activate an event, or post an alert.
When sensor simulation is enabled, the simulated values are stored in the same memory locations used for
process data from the sensor. The simulated values are then used throughout transmitter functioning. For
example, sensor simulation will affect:
•
All mass flow rate, temperature, and density values displayed or reported via outputs or digital
communications
•
The mass total and mass inventory values
•
All volume calculations and data, including reported values, volume totals, and volume inventories
•
All mass, temperature, density, or volume values logged to Data Logger
Sensor simulation does not affect any diagnostic values.
Unlike actual mass flow rate and density values, the simulated values are not temperature-compensated
(adjusted for the effect of temperature on the sensor’s flow tubes).
10.2 Enable or disable write-protection
Upper puck
Use the mechanical switch on the upper puck.
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Write-Protection
When enabled, Write-Protection prevents changes to the transmitter configuration. You can perform all other
functions, and you can view the transmitter configuration parameters.
Note
Write protection is available only by removing the display in order to access the upper puck component and
using the lock switch to set the switch ON.
122
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Complete the configuration
May 2024
Figure 10-1: Removing the transmitter housing cover
A. Display Component
B. Upper Puck Component
Configuration and Use Manual
123
Complete the configuration
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Figure 10-2: Setting Switch 1 ON (to the left) to Set Write-Protection
A. Switch 1
Write-protecting the transmitter primarily prevents accidental changes to configuration, not intentional
changes. Any user who can make changes to the configuration can disable write protection.
124
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Transmitter operation
May 2024
11 Transmitter operation
11.1 View process and diagnostic variables
Process variables provide information about the state of the process fluid. Diagnostic variables provide data
about device operation. You can use this data to monitor and troubleshoot your process.
11.1.1 View process and diagnostic variables using the display
The display reports the name of the variable (for example, Density), the current value of the variable, and the
associated unit of measure (for example, kg/m3).
Prerequisites
For a process or diagnostic variable to be viewed using the display, it must be configured as a display variable.
Procedure
•
If Auto Scroll is not enabled, activate ⇩ or ⇧ to move through the list of display variables.
•
If Auto Scroll is enabled, wait until the variable is displayed automatically. If you do not want to wait, you
can activate ⇩ or ⇧ to force the display to scroll.
11.1.2 View process variables and other data using ProLink III
Monitor process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data to maintain process quality.
ProLink III automatically displays process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data on the main screen.
Tip
ProLink III allows you to choose the process variables that appear on the main screen. You can also choose
whether to view data in Analog Gauge view or digital view, and you can customize the gauge settings. For
more information, see the ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual.
11.1.3 View process variables and other data using a field
communicator
Monitor process variables, diagnostic variables, and other data to maintain process quality.
Procedure
•
To view current values of basic process variables, choose Overview.
•
To view a more complete set of process variables, plus the current state of the outputs, choose Service
Tools → Variables.
•
To view diagnostic variables, choose Service Tools → Maintenance → Diagnostic Variables.
11.1.4 Effect of Sensor Flow Direction Arrow on digital
communications
Flow rates on the transmitter display or reported via digital communications are shown as positive or negative.
The sign depends on the interaction between Sensor Flow Direction Arrow and the actual flow direction.
This interaction affects flow rates shown on the transmitter display, ProLink III, and all other user interfaces.
Configuration and Use Manual
125
Transmitter operation
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Flow rate value
Setting of Sensor Flow
Direction Arrow
Transmitter display
Digital communications
Forward (same direction
as Flow arrow on sensor)
With Arrow
Positive (no sign)
Positive
Against Arrow
Negative
Negative
Reverse (opposite from
Flow arrow on sensor)
With Arrow
Negative
Negative
Against Arrow
Positive (no sign)
Positive
Actual flow direction
11.2 View and acknowledge status alerts
The transmitter posts a status alert whenever one of the specified conditions occurs. You can view active alerts
and you can acknowledge alerts. You do not have to acknowledge alerts. The transmitter will perform normal
measurement and reporting functions with unacknowledged alerts.
11.2.1 View and acknowledge alerts using the display
You can view information about all active or unacknowledged alerts, and you can acknowledge alerts.
The display uses the alert banner and the alert symbol ⓘ to provide information about alerts.
Table 11-1: Alert information on display
Display status
Cause
User action
Alert banner
One or more alerts are
active.
Resolve the conditions to clear the alert. When the alert is
cleared or acknowledged, the banner will be removed.
Alert symbol ⓘ
One or more alerts are
unacknowledged.
Acknowledge the alert. When all alerts are acknowledged,
the alert icon will be removed.
If alert security is enabled, the alert banner is never displayed. To view detailed information, you must use the
alert menu: Menu → (i) Alert List.
Note
Certain alerts do not clear until the transmitter is rebooted.
Procedure
•
If the alert banner appears:
a) Activate Info to view information about the alert.
b) Take appropriate steps to clear the alert.
c) Activate Ack to acknowledge the alert.
•
If ⓘ appears:
a) Choose Menu → (i) Alert List.
b) Select an alert to view more information about the specific alert or to acknowledge it individually.
c) Choose Acknowledge All Alerts to acknowledge all alerts on the list.
126
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Transmitter operation
May 2024
11.2.2 View and acknowledge alerts using ProLink III
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged. From this list, you can
acknowledge individual alerts or choose to acknowledge all alerts at once.
Note
Certain alerts do not clear until the transmitter is rebooted.
Procedure
1. View alerts on the ProLink III main screen under Alerts.
All active or unacknowledged alerts are listed. Take appropriate steps to clear all active alerts.
2. To acknowledge a single alert, check the Ack check box for that alert. To acknowledge all alerts at once,
select Ack All.
11.2.3 View alerts using a field communicator
You can view a list containing all alerts that are active, or inactive but unacknowledged.
Restriction
You cannot use a field communicator to acknowledge alerts. You can only view alerts. To acknowledge alerts,
use the display or make a connection to the transmitter using a different tool.
Procedure
•
To view active or unacknowledged alerts, choose Service Tools → Alerts.
All active alerts and unacknowledged alerts are listed. Select an alert to view detailed information.
•
To refresh the list, choose Service Tools → Alerts → Refresh Alerts.
11.3 Read totalizer and inventory values
Display
Menu → Operations → Totalizers → See Totals
ProLink III
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers
Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories
Field communicator
Process Variables → Device Overview → State & Tasks → Totalizer Control
Totalizers keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter since the last
totalizer reset. Inventories keep track of the total amount of mass or volume measured by the transmitter
since the last inventory reset.
11.4 Start, stop, and reset totalizers and inventories
When a totalizer or inventory is started, its value increases or decreases depending on the interaction of the
flow direction parameters. It continues tracking flow until it is stopped.
When a totalizer or inventory is reset, its value is set to 0. You can reset a totalizer or inventory while it is
started or while it is stopped.
•
You can start, stop, or reset each totalizer or inventory independently.
•
You can start, stop, or reset all totalizers and inventories as a group.
Configuration and Use Manual
127
Transmitter operation
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
11.4.1 Start, stop, and reset totalizers using the display
Prerequisites
To stop, start, or reset a single totalizer or inventory, the totalizer or inventory must be configured as a display
variable.
To reset an inventory using the display, this function must be enabled. To enable inventory reset using the
display, choose Menu → Configuration → Security → Display Security → Totalizers & Inventories → Inventory
Reset and set Totalizer Reset to Allowed and save. Note that this affects only the display functions. Resetting
inventories using other tools is not affected.
Procedure
•
To start or stop a single totalizer or inventory:
a) Wait or scroll until the totalizer or inventory appears on the display.
b) Choose Options.
c) Choose Start or Stop.
•
To start or stop all totalizers and inventories as a group:
a) Choose Menu → Operations → Totalizers.
b) Choose Start or Stop.
•
To reset a single totalizer or inventory:
a) Wait or scroll until the totalizer or inventory appears on the display.
b) Choose Options.
c) Choose Reset.
•
To reset all totalizers and inventories as a group:
a) Choose Menu → Operations → Totalizers.
b) Choose Reset All.
11.4.2 Start, stop, and reset totalizers using ProLink III
Prerequisites
To reset an inventory using ProLink III, this function must be enabled. To enable inventory reset using ProLink
III, choose Tools → Options and enable Reset Inventories from ProLink III. Note that this affects only ProLink
III. Resetting inventories using other tools is not affected.
Procedure
•
To start or stop a single totalizer:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers.
b) Scroll to the totalizer that you want to start or stop, and click Start or Stop.
•
To start or stop a single inventory:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories.
b) Scroll to the inventory that you want to start or stop, and click Start or Stop.
•
To start or stop all totalizers as a group:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers or Device Tools → Totalizer Control →
Inventories.
b) Select Start All Totals or Stop All Totals.
128
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Transmitter operation
May 2024
To reset a single totalizer:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers.
b) Scroll to the totalizer that you want to reset, and click Reset.
•
To reset a single inventory:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories.
b) Scroll to the inventory that you want to reset, and click Reset.
•
To reset all totalizers as a group:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Totalizers.
b) Select Reset All Totals.
•
To reset all inventories as a group:
a) Choose Device Tools → Totalizer Control → Inventories.
b) Select Reset All Inventories.
Configuration and Use Manual
129
Transmitter operation
May 2024
130
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
12 Operation using the batcher
12.1 Run a batch
You can run a batch using any of the presets that are enabled. You can change the target for the current
batch. You can pause and resume a batch in process. You can allow the batch to complete normally or you can
end it manually.
Restriction
You cannot use a field communicator to run a batch.
Prerequisites
The preset that you want to use must be enabled.
Procedure
1. Select the preset you want to use.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch and set Active Preset to the preset you
want to use.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Batcher and set Current Preset Number
to the preset you want to use.
Field communicator Not available
The preset contains parameters that control batch processing.
2. If desired, change the configured target to the target to be used for this batch only.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Current Preset Number to the preset you want to use, and set Batch
Target to the desired value.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher and set Current
Target to the desired value.
Field communicator Not available
You cannot set the target to a value that is greater than the Maximum Target value configured for the
batching application.
Changing the target here does not change the target configured in the preset.
Configuration and Use Manual
131
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
3. Begin the batch.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Begin.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and
select Begin Batch.
Field communicator Not available
The transmitter automatically resets the batch total to 0 if you have selected Reset on Start. Otherwise,
you must manually reset the batch total before the batch will start.
4. Monitor the batch during processing.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch and observe the value displayed in Batch
Total.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and
observe the values displayed in Current Total and Batch Time.
Field communicator Not available
5. Optional: Pause the batch at any time.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Pause.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and
select Pause Batch.
Field communicator Not available
Pausing a batch allows you to resume it later.
6. Optional: Resume the batch after it has been paused.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select Resume.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and
select Resume Batch.
Field communicator Not available
132
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
7. Optional: End the batch manually at any time before it reaches the target.
Option
Description
Display
Choose Menu → Batcher → Run Batch → Batch Control and select End.
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and
select End Batch.
Field communicator Not available
If you end a batch manually, you will not be able to resume it. You can end the batch while it is running
and while it is paused.
8. If you did not end the batch manually, wait until the batch ends automatically.
The batch ends automatically when it reaches the target or when it reaches the configured maximum
fill time.
9. Optional: Inhibit batch.
Option
Description
Display
Not available
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and set
Inhibit Batch Start to On or Off.
Field communicator Not available
While the Inhibit Batch input is active, a batch will not be allowed to start. Attempting to start a batch
while the batch is inhibited will cause the Start Not Okay alarm to be posted.
10. Optional: Inhibit totalizer.
Option
Description
Display
Not available
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and set
Inhibit Batch Totalizing to On or Off.
Field communicator Not available
When the Inhibit Totalizer input is active, the Batch Total will not increment. A timeout alarm will occur
if the Batch Total is inhibited beyond the max batch time. The batch inventory for the current preset will
not increment while Inhibit Totalizer is active.
11. Optional: Inhibit flow.
Option
Description
Display
Not available
ProLink III
Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher and set
Allow Batch End with Flow to On or Off.
Field communicator Not available
When the Inhibit Flow input is active, the batch will ignore the flow rate of the assigned flow source,
allowing a batch to end. The batch total will not increment when flow is inhibited.
Configuration and Use Manual
133
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
12.2 Perform AOC calibration
AOC calibration “trains” the AOC algorithm to adjust for your network speed and valve closure speed. AOC
calibration is required only if AOC Compensation Mode is set to AOC Algorithm.
There are two options for AOC calibration:
•
Calculate and save: When you are satisfied with the results of AOC calibration, you can save the current
AOC coefficient. It will be used for all batches.
•
Rolling calibration: The AOC coefficient is recalculated for each batch, based on the results of the most
recent batches.
Prerequisites
Compensation Mode must be set to AOC. AOC only functions when the discrete output is assigned to Primary
Valve and is opening and closing an actual valve.
12.2.1 Perform AOC calibration using the display
Procedure
•
To calculate and save an AOC coefficient:
a) Choose Menu → Batcher → AOC Calibration.
b) Set AOC Cal Status to On.
c) Run several batches, allowing each batch to run to completion, and observe the totals.
d) When batch repeatability meets requirements, set AOC Cal Status to Off.
AOC calibration is stopped, and the current coefficient is saved.
Important
If you are using a saved value, repeat AOC calibration:
— Whenever the fluid characteristics change, especially viscosity
— Whenever you change any configuration parameter that can affect flow measurement (e.g., damping)
•
To set up rolling calibration:
a) Choose Menu → Operations → Batcher → AOC Calibration.
b) Set AOC Window to the number of batches that the rolling AOC coefficient will be based on.
c) Set AOC Cal Status to On.
Important
If you are using rolling calibration, and fluid characteristics change or the transmitter configuration
changes, the transmitter will automatically adjust to the new conditions after a few batches.
12.2.2 Perform AOC calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
•
To calculate and save an AOC coefficient:
a) Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batcher → Run Batcher.
b) Click Start AOC Calibration.
c) Run several batches, allowing each batch to run to completion, and observe the totals. To set up
rolling calibration, choose Device Tools → Application Control → Batching → Run Batcher.
134
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
d) When batch repeatability meets requirements, click Save AOC Calibration.
AOC calibration is stopped, and the current coefficient is saved.
Important
If you are using a saved value, repeat AOC calibration:
— Whenever the fluid characteristics change, especially viscosity
— Whenever you change any configuration parameter that can affect flow measurement (e.g., damping)
•
To set up rolling calibration:
a) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Batcher.
b) Set AOC Window Length to the number of batches that the rolling AOC coefficient will be based on.
c) Choose Device Tools → Application Control → Run Batcher.
d) Click Start AOC Calibration.
Important
If you are using rolling calibration, and fluid characteristics change or the transmitter configuration
changes, the transmitter will automatically adjust to the new conditions after a few batches.
Configuration and Use Manual
135
Operation using the batcher
May 2024
136
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
13 Measurement support
13.1 Use Smart Meter Verification
Smart Meter Verification (SMV) provides in-process flow meter health verification by analyzing the meter
components related to measurement performance. You can run Smart Meter Verification without stopping
the process. Use this section to run a Smart Meter Verification test, view and interpret the results, set up
automatic execution, and check if a field reference point has been established.
13.1.1 Smart Meter Verification capabilities
Basic
Professional
Included
90-day trial, licensed
Calibration coefficients audit
●
●
Zero audit
●
●
Electronics verification
●
●
Automatic test scheduler
●
●
History of previous 20 results
●
●
Capability
Verification report
●(1)
(1) Create and export with ProLink III, or AMS SNAP-ON.
13.1.2 Setting the field reference point using the display
Prerequisites
Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification.
Procedure
Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Set Field Reference Point.
13.1.3 Setting the field reference point using the ProLink III
Prerequisites
Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification.
Procedure
Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Set Field Reference Point.
Important
Ensure the meter is full of single-phase fluid at normal operating conditions before establishing the Reference
Point. If the Field Reference Point was not run at operating conditions, it may not be appropriate for the
process.
NOTICE
Do not overwrite an existing Field Reference Point if the meter has been installed for a long period of time, or
if there is a chance of corrosion, erosion, or other tube damage.
Configuration and Use Manual
137
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
13.1.4 Run a Smart Meter Verification test
Run a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test to diagnose the flow meter (and flow meter system)
and verify if the flow meter is functioning properly and performing within factory specifications.
Important
Run the first Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test when the flow meter is installed in the pipeline
and the flow meter is at its normal operating conditions.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using the display
Prerequisites
Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Run Verification.
2. Select the desired output behavior.
Option
Description
Continue Measuring During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process
variables. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Fix at Last
Measured Value
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned
process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Fix at Fault
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will
run for approximately 140 seconds.
The test starts immediately.
3. Wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to
normal behavior.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using ProLink III Basic or Professional
Procedure
1. Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification if you have not done so
already.
2. Run Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional using ProLink III Basic or Professional:
• Smart Meter Verification Basic: Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Basic Meter
Verification
•
Smart Meter Verification Professional: Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification →
Run Verification
•
Smart Meter Verification Professional: Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Run Test
3. In the SMV Test Definition window, enter any desired information and click Next.
None of this information is required. It does not affect Smart Meter Verification processing.
ProLink III stores this information in the Smart Meter Verification database on the PC. It is not saved to
the transmitter.
138
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
4. Select the desired output behavior.
Option
Description
Continue Measuring During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process
variables. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Fix at Last
Measured Value
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned
process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Fix at Fault
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will
run for approximately 140 seconds.
5. Select Start and wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to
normal behavior.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test using a field communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Calibration → Smart Meter Verification → Manual Verification → Start
Procedure
1. Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification if you have not done so
already.
2. Select the desired output behavior.
Option
Description
Continue Measuring During the test, all outputs will continue to report their assigned process
variables. The test will run for approximately 90 seconds.
Fix at Last
Measured Value
During the test, all outputs will report the last measured value of their assigned
process variable. The test will run for approximately 140 seconds.
Fix at Fault
During the test, all outputs will go to their configured fault action. The test will
run for approximately 140 seconds.
The test starts immediately.
3. Wait for the test to complete.
Note
At any time during the process, you can abort the test. If the outputs were fixed, they will return to
normal behavior.
Run a Smart Meter Verification test from a Modbus host
Prerequisites
The Modbus host must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Read the Smart Meter Verification prerequisites in Use Smart Meter Verification if you have not done so
already.
2. If you are fixing outputs during the test, set the output state from Register 3093.
Configuration and Use Manual
139
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Option
Description
0
Last Measured Value
1
Fault Action
3. From Register 3000, write a 6 to start DMV or a 5 to abort it.
4. Read Register 3020. Is the test running?
Option
Description
> 0 = Yes
Read the percent complete from Register 3020.
Range: 0 to 100
0 = No
Continue to the next step.
5. Read Register 3000. Did the test run to completion?
Option
Description
0 = Yes
Continue to the next step.
> 0 = No Read the abort code on Register 3002.
2 = SMV timeout — check status of pickoff and drive coils
3 = Pickoff voltage low — check status of pickoff and drive coils
4 = Temperature unstable — verify that the temperature is stable and start again
7 = Drive loop AGC reported an amplitude error — check status of pickoff and drive coils
8 = High flow (dt) standard deviation — reduce flow rate and start again
9 = High flow (dt) mean value — reduce flow rate and start again
12 = Transmitter in fault — clear alarms before proceeding
13 = No factory air verification — perform factory calibration on air
14 = No factory water verification — perform factory calibration on water
15 = Drive frequency drift from carrier frequency — ensure temperature, flow, and density
are stable and start again
6. Read Register 3004. Has the test passed?
0 = Yes
The test has passed.
> 0 = No
The test has not passed. Continue to the next step.
7. Read Register 6348.
140
256
Possible extreme temperature or corrosion
512
Possible extreme temperature or damage
2048
Possible corrosion/erosion
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
13.1.5 View Smart Meter Verification test results
When the Smart Meter Verification Basic test is complete, a pass/fail result is displayed. With Smart Meter
Verification Professional, detailed results and reports are available.
Note
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, the twenty most recent results are available. If viewed using
ProLink III Basic or Professional, results for all tests that are in the PC database are available.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using the display
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is
complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Read Verification History.
2. To view Pass/Fail status time and date for an individual test, select it from the list.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using ProLink III Basic or
Professional
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is
complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
All Smart Meter Verification test results are stored on the same PC that Smart Meter Verification was initiated
from. To view a previous test report, the Smart Meter Verification Professional test must have been run on that
same PC.
Procedure
1. Choose one of the following options:
• Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Run Test → View Previous Test Results
•
Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification → History
2. To view details, choose the results of interest: Show Report (or Next to show the report).
ProLink III displays a report containing details of the most recent tests. The report is automatically
saved to the Smart Meter Verification database. You can print or export the report.
View Smart Meter Verification test results using a field communicator
In addition to test results, some field communicator brands provide a trend chart.
Results of the current Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test display automatically after the test is
complete.
With Smart Meter Verification Professional, use the following procedure to view previous test results.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Settings → Calibration → Smart Meter Verification → Manual Verification.
2. Choose Upload Results Data from Device.
The field communicator stores only the most recent test result. To view earlier results, you must upload
them from the device. They will be available only for the current session.
3. Choose Show Results Table.
The field communicator displays detailed results for the first test.
Configuration and Use Manual
141
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4. Press OK to move through all test records in the local database.
View Smart Meter Verification test results from a Modbus host
Prerequisites
To read test results, the Modbus host must be connected to the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Specify the test record you want to read by writing a value between 0 and 19 to the appropriate
register.
Register
Description
5779
Register 5825 = the most recent test
2. Read the Modbus register values using the descriptions in the following table.
Registers
Description
5697
Test number
5820 and 5821
Test result
5819
State
5818
Abort code (compressed)
5780
Time initiated
5782 and 5783
Inlet normalized data
5784 and 5785
Outlet normalized data
0 = Pass
1 = Caution
3. Disconnect as desired.
Interpreting Smart Meter Verification results
When the Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test is completed, the result is reported as Pass, Fail,
or Abort. (Some tools report the Fail result as Advisory instead.)
Pass
The meter is performing within factory specifications.
Abort When you execute a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test performs a self-
diagnostic check to ensure that the flow meter is stable prior to running the test. In the rare case that
this check reveals an issue, Smart Meter Verification will report an abort code.
If you manually cancel an in-process Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test, the test
result displays Abort Code 1: User-Initiated Abort. In this case, you can restart Smart
Meter Verification without any further action. In the rare case any other abort occurs, contact factory
support.
In all cases where a Smart Meter Verification Professional test aborts, no report will be generated.
Fail
142
If a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test ran at normal operations and failed, see
Resolve a failed Smart Meter Verification test to determine the appropriate actions.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
13.1.6 Resolve a failed Smart Meter Verification test
Use this procedure if a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test ran at normal operating conditions
while conditions were stable and failed.
Procedure
1. Verify the sensor by performing a visual inspection, density verification, or field proving.
2. If possible, run Smart Meter Verification Professional with ProLink III Basic or Professional and save the
results as follows:
•
In a .csv file
•
In a report
•
If the transmitter has a historian, retrieve the Smart Meter Verification results from the service or
historian files.
3. Contact the factory for further evaluation and instructions.
13.1.7 Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution
You can execute a Smart Meter Verification Basic or Professional test on demand or automatically schedule
future runs. You can schedule future runs via two different options: as a single test at a user-defined future
time, or automatically on a regular schedule.
Tip
The time between test runs must be between 1 and 1000 hours. The time for the first test run can be any
positive floating number.
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using the display
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Operations → Smart Meter Verification → Schedule Verification.
2. To schedule a single test:
a) Set Hours to 1st Run to the number of hours to elapse before the test is run.
b) Set Hours Between to 0.
3. To schedule a recurring execution:
a) Set Hours Between to the number of hours between recurring runs.
4. To disable scheduled execution:
a) Set Hours to 1st Run to 0.
b) Set Hours Between to 0.
Configuration and Use Manual
143
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using ProLink III Basic
or Professional
Procedure
1. Select one of the following paths to access the Smart Meter Verification scheduler:
• ProLink III Basic or Professional: Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification →
Schedule Meter Verification.
•
ProLink III Professional: Choose Smart Meter Verification Overview → Tools → Schedule Smart
Meter Verification.
2. To schedule a single test:
a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse before the
test is run.
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to 0 days, 0 hours, and 0 minutes.
3. To schedule a recurring execution:
a) Set Specify Time Until Next Run to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse before the
first test is run.
b) Set Specify Time Between Recurring Runs to the number of days, hours, and minutes to elapse
between runs.
4. To disable scheduled execution, choose Disable Scheduled Execution.
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution using a field
communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Calibration → Smart Meter Verification → Manual Verification → Start
Procedure
1. To schedule a single test:
a) Set Hrs Until Next Run to the number of hours to elapse before the test is run.
b) Set Recurring Hours to 0.
2. To schedule a recurring execution:
a) Set Hrs Until Next Run to the number of hours to elapse before the first test is run.
b) Set Recurring Hours to the number of hours to elapse between runs.
3. To disable scheduled execution, select Turn Off Schedule.
Set up Smart Meter Verification automatic execution from a Modbus host
Use the Modbus host to set up the schedule.
Prerequisites
To configure a test execution and view a scheduled test execution, the Modbus host must be connected to the
transmitter. Once the schedule is loaded into the transmitter, the Modbus host no longer has to be connected
to the transmitter.
Procedure
1. Choose any of the following options:
144
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
Option
Description
Specify the hours until test
execution for a single execution
Write a floating-point value to Register 2993.
Specify the hours for a recurring
execution
•
To specify the number of hours until the first test is executed,
write a floating-point value to Register 2993.
•
To specify the number of hours between test executions,
write a floating-point value to Register 2995.
View the number of hours until the
next execution
Read Register 2997.
Cancel a scheduled execution
•
Write 0 to Register 2993.
•
Write 0 to Register 2995.
2. Disconnect as desired.
Check for a field reference point
Use this procedure to check if a field reference point was created.
Prerequisites
•
Smart Meter Verification Professional
•
ProLink III Basic or Professional
Procedure
1. From ProLink III Basic or Professional, choose one of the following options:
• Device Tools → Diagnostics → Meter Verification → Run Test → View Previous Test Results
•
Smart Meter Verification Overview → Meter Verification → History
2. Select Export Data to CSV File.
3. Save the CSV file to your computer.
4. Locate and open the CSV file.
5. Locate and examine the two columns labeled, Inlet Stiffness and Outlet Stiffness.
• If the field reference point has not been established, the numbers in both columns will be exactly 1.
•
If the field reference point has been established, the numbers located in both columns will be close
to 1. The Inlet Stiffness and Outlet Stiffness numbers do not have to match.
13.2 Advanced Phase Measurement software
Micro Motion Advanced Phase Measurement software improves long-term flow reporting and measurement
performance in processes with intermittent periods of two-phase flow, including liquids with entrained gas
or gas with entrained liquid. If Advanced Phase Measurement is combined with the Net Oil or concentration
measurement software options, the software can also report liquid concentration, Net Oil, and/or Gas Void
Fraction (GVF) during the same two-phase conditions.
The following measurement options are available with Advanced Phase Measurement software:
•
Net Oil
•
Liquid with Gas
Configuration and Use Manual
145
Measurement support
May 2024
•
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Gas with Liquid
Note
Each option is licensed separately in the transmitter. Field upgrades are permitted.
Table 13-1: Net oil option (MA only)
License option
Description
Availability
MA — Manual Advanced Phase
Measurement configuration
Suitable for a mixture of oil and water
under predictable flow conditions.
Includes manual drive gain threshold
only.
This option is the 1600 upgrade
for Production Volume Reconciliation
(PVR).
Do not combine with APM liquid with
gas (option PL) — basic remediation for
gas is included.
License option (ordering code)
Description
Availability
PL — Advanced Phase Measurement
Liquid with Gas
Suitable for any liquid with entrained
gas.
Can be combined with license code
concentration measurement (CM).
License option (ordering code)
Description
Availability
PG — Advanced Phase Measurement
Gas with Liquid
Suitable for any gas that may contain
entrained liquids (mist).
Cannot be activated with any other
license code.
Table 13-2: Liquid with gas
Table 13-3: Gas with liquid
13.3 Zero the meter
Display
Menu → Service Tools → Verification & Calibration → Meter Zero → Zero Calibration
ProLink III
Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate Zero
Field communicator
Device Settings → Calibration → Zero Calibration → Perform Zero Calibration
Zeroing the meter establishes a baseline for process measurement by analyzing the sensor's output when
there is no flow through the sensor tubes.
Important
In most cases, the factory zero is more accurate than the field zero. Do not zero the meter unless one of the
following is true:
• The zero is required by site procedures.
•
The stored zero value fails the zero verification procedure.
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the
zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
Prerequisites
Before performing a field zero, execute the zero verification procedure to see whether or not a field zero can
improve measurement accuracy.
Important
Do not verify the zero or zero the meter if a high-severity alert is active. Correct the problem, then verify the
zero or zero the meter. You may verify the zero or zero the meter if a low-severity alert is active.
146
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
Procedure
1. Prepare the meter:
a) After applying power, allow the meter to warm up for at least 20 minutes.
b) Run the process fluid through the sensor until the sensor temperature reaches the normal
process operating temperature.
c) Stop flow through the sensor by shutting the downstream valve, and then the upstream valve if
available.
d) Verify that the sensor is blocked in, that flow has stopped, and that the sensor is completely full
of process fluid.
e) Observe the drive gain, temperature, and density readings. If they are stable, check the Live Zero
or Field Verification Zero value. If the average value is close to 0, you should not need to zero the
meter.
2. Modify Zero Time, if desired.
Zero Time controls the amount of time the transmitter takes to determine its zero-flow reference point.
The default Zero Time is 20 seconds. For most applications, the default Zero Time is appropriate. For
gas applications, lowering the Zero Time to five seconds is recommended.
3. Start the zero procedure and wait until it completes.
When the calibration is complete:
•
If the zero procedure was successful, a Calibration Success message and a new zero value are
displayed.
•
If the zero procedure failed, a Calibration Failed message is displayed.
Postrequisites
Restore normal flow through the sensor by opening the valves.
Need help?
If the zero fails:
•
Ensure that there is no flow through the sensor, then retry.
•
Remove or reduce sources of electromechanical noise, then retry.
•
Set Zero Time to a lower value (especially when measuring gas flow), then retry.
•
If the zero continues to fail, contact customer service.
•
If you want to restore the most recent valid value from transmitter memory:
— Using the display: Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Meter Zero → Restore Zero →
Restore Previous Zero
— Using ProLink III: Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate
Zero → Restore Prior Zero
— Using a field communicator: Not available
•
If you want to restore the factory zero:
— Using the display: Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Meter Zero → Restore Zero →
Restore Factory Zero
— Using ProLink III: Device Tools → Calibration → Smart Zero Verification and Calibration → Calibrate
Zero → Restore Factory Zero
— Using a field communicator: Device Settings → Calibration → Zero Calibration → Restore Factory Zero
Configuration and Use Manual
147
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Restriction
Restore the factory zero only if your meter was purchased as a unit, it was zeroed at the factory, and you are
using the original components.
Related information
Verify the zero
13.3.1 Terminology used with zero verification and zero calibration
Term
Definition
Zero
In general, the offset required to synchronize the left pickoff and the right pickoff under
conditions of zero flow. Unit = microseconds.
Factory zero
The zero value obtained at the factory, under laboratory conditions.
Field zero
The zero value obtained by performing a zero calibration outside the factory.
Prior zero
The zero value stored in the transmitter at the time a field zero calibration is begun. May be
the factory zero or a previous field zero.
Manual zero
The zero value stored in the transmitter, typically obtained from a zero calibration
procedure. It may also be configured manually. Also called “mechanical zero” or “stored
zero”.
Live zero
The real-time bidirectional mass flow rate with no flow damping or mass flow cutoff
applied. An adaptive damping value is applied only when the mass flow rate changes
dramatically over a very short interval. Unit = configured mass flow measurement unit.
Zero stability
A laboratory-derived value used to calculate the expected accuracy for a sensor. Under
laboratory conditions at zero flow, the average flow rate is expected to fall within the range
defined by the zero stability value (0 ± zero stability). Each sensor size and model has a
unique zero stability value.
Zero calibration
The procedure used to determine the zero value.
Zero time
The time period over which the zero calibration procedure is performed. Unit = seconds.
Field verification zero
A 3-minute running average of the Live Zero value, calculated by the transmitter. Unit =
configured mass flow measurement unit.
Zero verification
A procedure used to evaluate the stored zero and determine whether or not a field zero
can improve measurement accuracy.
13.4 Set up pressure compensation
Pressure compensation adjusts process measurement to compensate for the pressure effect on the sensor.
The pressure effect is the change in the sensor’s sensitivity to flow and density caused by the difference
between the calibration pressure and the process pressure.
Tip
Not all sensors or applications require pressure compensation. The pressure effect for a specific sensor model
can be found in the product data sheet located at Emerson.com. If you are uncertain about implementing
pressure compensation, contact customer service.
Prerequisites
You will need the flow factor, density factor, and calibration pressure values for your sensor.
•
For the flow factor and density factor, see the product data sheet for your sensor.
•
For the calibration pressure, see the calibration sheet for your sensor. If the data is unavailable, use 20 psi
(1.38 bar).
148
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
You must be able to supply pressure data to the transmitter.
13.4.1 Set up pressure compensation using the display
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure.
2. Set Units to the pressure unit used by the external pressure device.
3. Enter Flow Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per psi. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the flow factor is −0.0002 % per psi, enter +0.0002 % per PSI.
4. Enter Density Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3/psi. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the density factor is −0.000006 g/cm3/psi, enter +0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
5. Set Calibration Pressure to the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure
at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
Option
Description
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for pressure data.
Setup
a. Set Pressure Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other Primary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
No other Secondary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature
device.
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals.
a. Set Pressure Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write pressure data to the meter
at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
The current pressure value is displayed in the External Pressure field. Verify that the value is correct.
Configuration and Use Manual
149
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
If you are using external temperature data, verify the external temperature value displayed in the Inputs
group on the ProLink III main window.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → External Variables and verify the value for External Pressure.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → Process → External Pressure and verify the value.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → External Variables and verify the value for External Temperature.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → Process → External Temperature and verify the value for External
Temperature.
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the value for External
Temperature.
Choose Menu → Service Tools → Service Data → View Process Variables and verify the values for External
Temperature and External Pressure.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → External Variables and verify the values for External Temperature and
External Pressure.
Choose Service Tools → Variables → Process and verify the values for External Temperature and External
Pressure.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART tag of the external device.
13.4.2 Set up pressure compensation using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Pressure Compensation.
2. Set Pressure Compensation Status to Enabled.
3. Set Pressure Unit to the unit used by the external pressure device.
4. Enter the Density Factor and Flow Factor for your sensor.
a) Set Process Fluid to Liquid Volume or Gas Standard Volume, as appropriate.
b) Compare the values shown in Recommended Density Factor and Recommended Flow Factor to
the values from the product data sheet.
c) To use the recommended values, click Accept Recommended Values.
d) To use different factors, enter your values in the Density Factor and Flow Factor fields.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3/psi. When entering the value, reverse
the sign.
Example
If the density factor is −0.000006 g/cm3/psi, enter +0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per psi. When entering the value, reverse
the sign.
150
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
Example
If the flow factor is −0.0002 % per psi, enter +0.0002 % per PSI.
5. Set Flow Calibration Pressure to the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure
at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
Option
Description
Polling
The meter polls an external
device for pressure data.
Setup
a. Set Pressure Source to Poll for External Value.
b. Set Polling Slot to an available slot.
c. Set Polling Control to Poll as Primary or Poll as Secondary.
Option
Description
Poll as Primary
No other Primary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
Poll as Secondary
No other Secondary HART masters
will be on the network. A field
communicator is not a HART master.
d. Set External Device Tag to the HART tag of the temperature
device.
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals.
a. Set Pressure Source to Fixed Value or Digital
Communications.
b. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write pressure data to the meter
at appropriate intervals.
Postrequisites
The current pressure value is displayed in the External Pressure field. Verify that the value is correct.
Need help?
If the value is not correct:
•
Ensure that the external device and the meter are using the same measurement unit.
•
For polling:
— Verify the wiring between the meter and the external device.
— Verify the HART tag of the external device.
13.4.3 Configure pressure compensation using a field communicator
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → External Pressure/Temperature →
Pressure
Procedure
1. Set Pressure Unit to the unit used by the external pressure device.
2. Enable Pressure Compensation.
Configuration and Use Manual
151
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
3. Set Flow Calibration Pressure to the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated.
The calibration pressure is the pressure at which your sensor was calibrated, and defines the pressure
at which there is no pressure effect. If the data is unavailable, enter 20 PSI.
4. Enter Flow Press Factor for your sensor.
The flow factor is the percent change in the flow rate per psi. When entering the value, reverse the sign.
Example
If the flow factor is −0.0002 % per PSI, enter +0.0002 % per PSI.
5. Enter Density Pressure Factor for your sensor.
The density factor is the change in fluid density, in g/cm3/PSI. When entering the value, reverse the
sign.
Example
If the density factor is −0.000006 g/cm3/PSI, enter +0.000006 g/cm3/PSI.
6. Choose the method to be used to supply pressure data, and perform the required setup.
Method
Description
Digital
communications
A host writes pressure data
to the meter at appropriate
intervals.
Setup
a. Using a field communicator, choose Configure
→ Manual Setup → Measurements → Optional Setup →
External Pressure/Temperature → Pressure.
b. Set Pressure Compensation to Enable.
c. Perform the necessary host programming and
communications setup to write pressure data to the
transmitter at appropriate intervals.
13.5 Validate the meter
Display
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Mass Flow Settings → Meter
Factor
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow Variables → Volume Flow Settings →
Meter Factor
Menu → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Meter Factor
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Mass Flow Rate Meter Factor
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Flow → Volume Flow Rate Meter Factor
Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Density → Density Meter Factor
Field communicator
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Mass Flow → Mass Factor
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Volume Flow → Volume Factor
Device Settings → Process Configuration → Density → Density Factor
Meter validation compares flow meter measurements reported by the transmitter to an external
measurement standard. If the transmitter value for mass flow, volume flow, or density measurement is
significantly different from the external measurement standard, you may want to adjust the corresponding
meter factor. The flow meter’s actual measurement is multiplied by the meter factor, and the resulting value is
reported and used in further processing.
Changing a meter factor is very uncommon. Usually, it's done by official, legal proving companies. And the
meter factor is typically changed in the PLC, not at the meter.
152
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
Prerequisites
Identify the meter factor(s) that you will calculate and set. You may set any combination of the three meter
factors: mass flow, volume flow, and density. Note that all three meter factors are independent:
•
The meter factor for mass flow affects only the value reported for mass flow.
•
The meter factor for density affects only the value reported for density.
•
The meter factor for volume flow affects only the value reported for volume flow or gas standard volume
flow.
Important
To adjust volume flow, you must set the meter factor for volume flow. Setting a meter factor for mass flow
and a meter factor for density will not produce the desired result. The volume flow calculations are based on
original mass flow and density values, before the corresponding meter factors have been applied.
If you plan to calculate the meter factor for volume flow, be aware that validating volume in the field may be
expensive, and the procedure may be hazardous for some process fluids.
Obtain a reference device (external measurement device) for the appropriate process variable.
Important
For good results, the reference device must be highly accurate.
Procedure
1. Determine the meter factor as follows:
a) Use the flow meter to take a sample measurement.
b) Measure the same sample using the reference device.
c) Calculate the meter factor using the following formula:
NewMeterFactor = ConfiguredMeterFactor ×
ReferenceMeasurement
FlowmeterMeasurement
2. Ensure that the calculated meter factor does not fall outside 0.98 and 1.02. If the meter factor is outside
these limits, contact customer service.
3. Configure the meter factor in the transmitter.
Calculating the meter factor for mass flow
The flow meter is installed and validated for the first time. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter
is 250.27 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250 lb. The mass flow meter factor is
calculated as follows:
MeterFlowMassFlow = 1 x
The first meter factor for mass flow is 0.9989.
250
= 0.9989
250.27
One year later, the flow meter is validated again. The mass flow measurement from the transmitter is
250.07 lb. The mass flow measurement from the reference device is 250.25 lb. The new mass flow meter
factor is calculated as follows:
MeterFlowMassFlow = 0.9989 x 250.25 = 0.9996
250.07
The new meter factor for mass flow is 0.9996.
Configuration and Use Manual
153
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
13.6 Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration
Density calibration establishes the relationship between the density of the calibration fluids and the signal
produced at the sensor. Density calibration includes the calibration of the D1 (low density, usually air) and D2
(high density, usually water) calibration points.
Important
Micro Motion flow meters are calibrated at the factory, and normally do not need to be calibrated in the field.
Calibrate the flow meter only if you must do so to meet regulatory requirements. Contact customer support
before calibrating the flow meter.
Tip
Use meter validation and meter factors, rather than calibration, to prove the meter against a regulatory
standard or to correct measurement error.
Prerequisites
•
During density calibration, the sensor must be completely filled with the calibration fluid, and flow through
the sensor must be at the lowest rate allowed by your application. This is usually accomplished by closing
the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor, then filling the sensor with the appropriate fluid.
•
D1 and D2 density calibration require a D1 (low-density) fluid and a D2 (high-density) fluid. You may use air
and water.
•
If LD Optimization is enabled on your meter, disable it. To do this using a field communicator,
choose Device Tools → Configuration → Informational Parameters → Sensor → LD Optimization and select
Disable. LD Optimization is used only with large sensors in hydrocarbon applications. If you are not using a
field communicator, contact Emerson before continuing.
•
The calibrations must be performed without interruption, in the order shown. Ensure that you are
prepared to complete the process without interruption.
•
Before performing the calibration, record your current calibration parameters. You can do this by saving
the current configuration to a file on the PC. If the calibration fails, restore the known values.
13.6.1 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using the display
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
2. Close the shutoff valve downstream from the sensor.
3. Fill the sensor with the D1 fluid and allow the sensor to achieve thermal equilibrium.
4. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Verification and Calibration → Density Calibration.
5. Perform the D1 calibration.
a) Choose D1 (Air).
b) Enter the density of your D1 fluid.
c) Choose Start Calibration.
d) Wait for the calibration to complete. This should take approximately 10 seconds.
e) Choose Finished.
6. Fill the sensor with the D2 fluid and allow the sensor to achieve thermal equilibrium.
154
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
7. Perform the D2 calibration.
a) Choose D2 (Water).
b) Enter the density of your D2 fluid.
c) Choose Start Calibration.
d) Wait for the calibration to complete. This will take approximately 10 seconds.
e) Choose Finished.
8. Open the shutoff valve.
13.6.2 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using ProLink III
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
2. See the Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1: D1 and D2 Calibration Work Flow Using ProLink III
D1 Calibration
Close shutoff valve
downstream from sensor
Fill sensor with D1 fluid
D2 Calibration
Fill sensor with D2 fluid
ProLink Menu >
ProLink Menu >
Calibration >
Calibration >
Density Cal - Point 1
Density Cal - Point 2
Enter density of D1 fluid
Enter density of D2 fluid
Do Cal
Do Cal
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns red
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Calibration in Progress
light turns green
Close
Close
Done
13.6.3 Perform a D1 and D2 density calibration using a field
communicator
Procedure
1. Read the Prerequisites in Perform a (standard) D1 and D2 density calibration if you have not already
done so.
Configuration and Use Manual
155
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2. See Figure 13-2.
Figure 13-2: D1 and D2 Calibration Work Flow with a Field Communicator
Postrequisites
If you disabled LD Optimization before the calibration procedure, re-enable it.
13.7 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim Offset
Trim Offset adjusts the meter's concentration measurement to match a reference value.
Tip
You can adjust concentration measurement by applying the trim offset only, or by applying both the trim
offset and the trim slope. For most applications, the trim offset is sufficient.
156
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Measurement support
May 2024
Prerequisites
Ensure that the active matrix is the one that you want to trim. You can set the offset separately for each matrix
on your transmitter.
You must be able to take a sample of your process fluid and obtain a laboratory concentration value at line
density and line temperature.
Procedure
1. Take a concentration reading from the meter, and record line density and line temperature.
2. Take a sample of the process fluid and obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and
line temperature, in the units used by the meter.
3. Subtract the meter value from the laboratory value.
4. Enter the result as the trim offset.
• Using ProLink III: Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration
Measurement, set Matrix Being Configured to your matrix, and enter Trim Offset.
•
Using a field communicator: Choose Configure → Manual Setup → Measurements → Optional Setup
→ Conc Measurement → Configure Matrix and set Matrix Being Configured to your matrix.
Then choose Service Tools → Maintenance → Calibration → Trim CM Process Variables and enter
Concentration Offset.
5. Take another concentration reading from the meter, and compare it to the laboratory value.
• If the two values are acceptably close, the trim is complete.
•
If the two values are not acceptably close; i.e. not within the density specification of the sensor,
repeat this procedure.
Calculating the trim offset
Laboratory value
64.21 °Brix
Meter value
64.93 °Brix
Concentration offset: −0.72
64.21 − 64.93 = −0.72
13.8 Adjust concentration measurement with Trim Slope
and Trim Offset
Trim Slope and Trim Offset adjust the meter's concentration measurement to match a reference value.
Tip
You can adjust concentration measurement by applying the trim offset only, or by applying both the trim
offset and the trim slope. For most applications, the trim offset is sufficient.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the active matrix is the one that you want to trim. You can set the offset and slope separately for
each matrix on your transmitter.
You must be able to take measurements of your process fluid at two different concentrations.
You must be able to take a sample of your process fluid at each of these concentrations.
For each sample, you must be able to obtain a laboratory concentration value at line density and line
temperature.
Configuration and Use Manual
157
Measurement support
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Procedure
1. Collect data for Comparison 1.
a) Take a concentration reading from the meter and record line density and line temperature.
b) Take a sample of the process fluid at the current concentration.
c) Obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and line temperature, in the units
used by the meter.
2. Collect data for Comparison 2.
a) Change the concentration of your process fluid.
b) Take a concentration reading from the meter and record line density and line temperature.
c) Take a sample of the process fluid at the current concentration.
d) Obtain a laboratory value for concentration at line density and line temperature, in the units
used by the meter.
3. Populate the following equation with values from each comparison.
4. Solve for A (slope).
ConcentrationLab = A × ConcentrationMeter + B
5. Solve for B (offset), using the calculated slope and one set of values.
6. Enter the results as the trim slope and the trim offset.
• Using ProLink III: Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Process Measurement → Concentration
Measurement, set Matrix Being Configured to your matrix, and enter Trim Slope and Trim Offset.
•
Using a field communicator: Choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup
→ Concentration Measurement → Configure Matrix and set Matrix Being Configured to your
matrix. Then choose Device Settings → Process Configuration → Optional Setup → Concentration
Measurement → Trim CM Process Variables and enter Concentration Slope and Concentration
Offset.
7. Take another concentration reading from the meter, and compare it to the laboratory value.
• If the two values are acceptably close, the trim is complete.
•
If the two values are not acceptably close, repeat this procedure.
Calculating the trim slope and the trim offset
Comparison 1
Comparison 2
Laboratory value
50.00%
Meter value
49.98%
Laboratory value
16.00%
Meter value
15.99%
Populate the equations:
Solve for A:
50 = A × 49.98 + B
16 = A × 15.99 + B
50.00 − 16.00 = 34.00
49.98 − 15.99 = 39.99
34 = A × 33.99
158
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Solve for B:
Concentration slope (A): 1.00029
Concentration offset (B): 0.00551
Configuration and Use Manual
Measurement support
May 2024
A = 1.00029
50.00 = 1.00029 × 49.98 + B
50.00 = 49.99449 + B
B = 0.00551
159
Measurement support
May 2024
160
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Maintenance
May 2024
14 Maintenance
14.1 Install a new transmitter license
Display
Menu → Service Tools → License Manager
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Feature License
Field communicator
Not available
Whenever you purchase additional features or request a trial license, you must install a new transmitter
license. The new license makes the new features available on your transmitter. For concentration
measurement and API Referral, you may still need to enable the application.
Prerequisites
•
You must have a license file provided by Micro Motion:
— perm.lic: Permanent license file
— temp.lic: Temporary license file
•
A USB-C drive
Procedure
•
To install a license using the display:
a) Choose Menu → Service Tools → License Manager.
Choose either Enter Permanent License or Enter Trial License.
b) Use the arrow keys to enter the license key.
•
To install a license using ProLink III:
a) Open the license file.
b) Choose Device Tools → Configuration → Feature License.
c) Copy the license from the file to the appropriate License Key field.
The features supported by the new license are displayed.
If you installed a temporary license, the transmitter will revert to its original feature set when the license
period has expired. To purchase a feature for permanent use, contact customer support.
Postrequisites
If you installed a permanent license, update the options model code to match the new license. The options
model code represents the installed features. No power cycling or disconnecting and reconnecting to the
transmitter is necessary.
Configuration and Use Manual
161
Maintenance
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
14.2 Upgrade the transmitter firmware
You can upgrade the transmitter firmware to stay current with development and to take advantage of any new
features.
14.2.1 Using a USB drive with the display
You must have the firmware upgrade files provided by Micro Motion.
Prerequisites
The service port must be enabled. It is enabled by default. However, if you need to enable it, choose Menu →
Configuration → Security and set Service Port to On.
Any USB-C device used will need to be formatted using the FAT/FAT 32 file system.
Procedure
1. Copy the folder containing the firmware upgrade files to a USB drive.
2. Open the wiring compartment and insert the USB drive into the service port.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is
powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion, resulting in serious injury or
death.
3. Follow the prompts once the transmitter recognizes the USB drive.
4. Select USB Drive → Transmitter.
5. Select Update Device Software.
6. Select the firmware upgrade folder and follow the prompts.
Note
If required, the transmitter upgrade procedure automatically includes an upgrade to the core processor
software.
If you chose to reboot the transmitter at a later date, you can reboot it from the menu, or you can
power-cycle it.
7. Verify the transmitter configuration and all safety parameters.
8. Enable write-protection.
14.2.2 Using the USB-C service port and ProLink III
You can upgrade the transmitter firmware to stay current with development and to take advantage of any new
features.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered
up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion, resulting in serious injury or death.
Prerequisites
You must have the firmware upgrade files provided by Emerson.
Procedure
1. In ProLink III, choose Device Tools → Transmitter Software Update.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the firmware upgrade files.
162
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Maintenance
May 2024
3. Select Update.
Files will be copied to the transmitter. However, the transmitter will not be updated until it is rebooted.
ProLink will give you the option to reboot once the files are copied. If you chose to reboot the
transmitter at a later date, you can reboot it from the display, or you can power-cycle it.
4. Verify the transmitter configuration and all safety parameters.
14.3 Reboot the transmitter
Display
Menu → Service Tools → Reboot Transmitter
ProLink III
Not available
Field communicator
Device Settings → Restore/Restart → Device Reset
For certain configuration changes to take effect, the transmitter must be rebooted. You must also reboot the
transmitter in order to clear certain status alerts.
Rebooting the transmitter has the same effect as power-cycling the transmitter.
Prerequisites
Follow appropriate procedures to select the appropriate time for rebooting the transmitter. The reboot
typically takes about 10 seconds.
Postrequisites
Check the transmitter clock. During the reboot, the transmitter clock is powered by the battery, therefore the
transmitter clock and all timestamps should be accurate. If the transmitter clock is not correct, the battery may
need replacement.
14.4 Battery replacement
The transmitter contains a battery that is used to power the clock when the transmitter is not powered up.
Users cannot service or replace the battery. If the battery requires replacement, contact customer support.
If the battery is non-functional and the transmitter is powered down, then powered up, the clock will restart
from the time of the power-down. All timestamps will be affected. You can correct the issue by resetting the
transmitter clock. For a permanent resolution, the 1600 module must be replaced.
Configuration and Use Manual
163
Maintenance
May 2024
164
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
15 Log files, history files, and service files
15.1 Generate history files
Display(1)
Menu → USB Options → Transmitter → USB Drive → Download Historical Files
Menu → USB Options → Transmitter → USB Drive → Download Service Files
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration Transfer → Download Historical Files
Field communicator
Not available
(1) Requires a USB connection.
The transmitter automatically saves historical data of several types, including process and diagnostic variables,
Smart Meter Verification test results, and totalizer values. To access the historical data, you can generate a log
file, then view it on your PC.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered
up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion resulting in injury or death.
Prerequisites
If you want to generate a totalizer log, you must have previously configured the transmitter to record totalizer
data. However, there is a totalizer history that is logged automatically.
Procedure
1. Select the type of log file that you want to generate.
2. If you selected historian data (process and diagnostic variables):
a) Set the date and time for the first entry in the historian log file.
b) Set the number of days that the log file will include.
c) Select the record type.
Option
Description
1 Second Raw Data
The current values of process and diagnostic variables, recorded at 1-second
intervals.
5 Min Average Data
The minimum and maximum values of the 1-second raw data over the last
5 minutes, plus the average and the standard deviation, recorded at 5-minute
intervals.
The system provides an estimated file size or transfer time.
The log file is written to the specified location. File names are assigned as follows:
•
Historian files: The file name is based on the transmitter tag, the starting date of the log contents, and the
record type. The record type is shown as F or S:
— F = Fast, for 1-second raw data
— S = Slow, for 5-minute average data
•
SMV files:
— SmvLast20Data.csv
Configuration and Use Manual
165
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
— SmvLongTermData.csv
•
Totalizer history files: TotLog.txt
15.1.1 Historian data and log
The 1600 transmitter offers a licensable Data Historian option. If enabled, the transmitter automatically saves
information about specific process and diagnostic variables. You can generate a log from this data that tracks
totalizers and inventories with 21 days worth of data. The historian log is an ASCII file in .csv format.
Contents of the historian log
There are two types of historian records:
1-second raw data
The current values of process and diagnostic variables, recorded at 1-second intervals.
5-minute average data The minimum and maximum values of the 1-second raw data, plus the average and
the standard deviation, calculated and recorded at 5-minute intervals.
When you generate the log, you can specify which type of record you want to see.
The historian in the transmitter internal memory contains a minimum of 7 days of 1-second raw data and
30 days of 5-minute average data.
Each record contains data for the following process and diagnostic variables:
•
Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
•
Mass flow rate (kg/sec)
•
Volume flow rate (l/sec) or GSV flow rate
•
Density (g/cm³)
•
Line temperature (°C)
•
External temperature (if available)
•
Pressure (if available)
•
If concentration measurement is enabled:
— Standard volume flow rate
— Net mass flow rate
— Net volume flow rate
— Referred density
— Concentration
•
If API Referral is enabled:
— CTPL or CTL
— Corrected density
— Corrected volume flow rate
•
Alert status registers (hexadecimal format)
•
Live zero (kg/sec)
•
Tube frequency (Hz)
•
Drive gain (%)
166
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
•
Left pickoff (filtered) (V)
•
Right pickoff (filtered (V)
•
Left pickoff (raw) (V)
•
Delta T
•
Case temperature (°C)
•
Voltage applied to the core processor (V)
•
Temperature of the core processor board (°C)
•
Temperature of the transmitter electronics (°C)
Historian data and power-cycles
Historian data is maintained across transmitter reboots and power-cycles.
Historian data and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, existing historian data is not affected.
Example: Historian log, 5-minute average data
S TAG:SUPPLY UID:22729F1F
SW:000000045 800:000000402
MassFlow
MassFlow
MassFlow
MassFlow
…
DST ON:Mountain GMT-7.0 SM:T075
SN:000000000
kg/s Max
kg/s Min
kg/s Avg
kg/s Std
…
8/25/2020 9:58
0.0082359
0
0.00091223
9.76E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:03
0.001018
0.00084441
0.00091756
1.61E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:08
0.00099489
0.00086279
0.00092519
1.44E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:13
0.0010835
0.00080879
0.00093774
2.01E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:18
0.0011767
0.00084206
0.00094224
2.11E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:23
0.0010243
0.00086888
0.00094534
1.85E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:28
0.0010903
0.00084823
0.00094747
1.81E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:33
0.0010319
0.00085327
0.00095123
1.67E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:38
0.0011232
0.00088614
0.00095222
1.59E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:43
0.0010841
0.00081306
0.00095126
1.99E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:48
0.0010999
0.00086106
0.00095333
1.93E-05
…
8/25/2020 10:53
0.0011523
0.00085537
0.00095528
2.01E-05
…
…
Note
The historian log displays only in English and the .csv file saves everything in base engineering units of
kg/sec, l/s, deg C, g/cc, bar and m/s. Time is saved in UTC time.
Configuration and Use Manual
167
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
15.1.2 Smart Meter Verification history and log
The transmitter automatically saves test data for all Smart Meter Verification tests. You can generate a log
containing data for the 20 most recent tests or for all Smart Meter Verification tests. The log is an ASCII file
in .csv format.
Contents of Smart Meter Verification log
Each record in the Smart Meter Verification log represents a Smart Meter Verification test. Each record
contains the following information:
•
Date and time of test
•
Data collected during the test
•
The abort code (15 = test completed normally)
•
A pass/fail result for the left pickoff (0 = Pass, 1 = Fail)
•
A pass/fail result for the right pickoff (0 = Pass, 1 = Fail)
•
The sensor type code
•
The sensor serial number
Smart Meter Verification history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, Smart Meter Verification history is not affected.
Smart Meter Verification history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, Smart Meter Verification history is not
affected.
15.1.3 Totalizer log
The totalizer log can track four configurable totals. The period is configurable; you can configure the
transmitter to save totalizer and inventory values at a user-specified interval and then generate a totalizer
log. The totalizer log is an ASCII file.
Contents of totalizer log
The totalizer log contains one record for each logged totalizer or inventory value. Each record contains the
following information:
•
Default totalizer or inventory name (user-specified names are not used)
•
Value and measurement unit
•
Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
The totalizer log also contains a line item for each totalizer or inventory reset.
Note
• The historian totalizer log is configurable, but defaults to mass and volume totalizers logged at one hour
intervals.
•
The entire log saves 240 lines before rolling the last lines out, so 5 days of totalizer data are saved by
default.
Totalizer logs and power cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the totalizer log is not affected.
168
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Totalizer logs and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, the totalizer log is not affected.
Example: Totalizer log
================================================================================
Device UID: 22729F1F
Name
Device Tag: SUPPLY
Value
Units
Time Zone: GMT-7.00
================================================================================
Mass Fwd Total
61.74707
grams
9/12/2020 20:00
Mass Fwd Inv
61.74705
grams
9/12/2020 20:00
Mass Fwd Total
61.74707
grams
9/12/2020 21:00
Mass Fwd Inv
61.74705
grams
9/12/2020 21:00
Mass Fwd Total
61.74707
grams
9/12/2020 22:00
Mass Fwd Inv
61.74705
grams
9/12/2020 22:00
Mass Fwd Total
61.74707
grams
9/12/2020 23:00
Mass Fwd Inv
61.74705
grams
9/12/2020 23:00
Mass Fwd Total
61.74707
grams
9/13/2020 0:00
Mass Fwd Inv
61.74705
grams
9/13/2020 0:00
…
Note
The totalizer history displays only in English.
Read contract totals
You can read contract totals for the current 24-hour contract period and for the previous 24-hour contract
period. Depending on the configuration of the totalizer log, you may be able to read contract totals for earlier
periods.
The contract totals are derived from existing inventories. However, they are reset automatically at the
beginning of each contract period. Therefore, the values shown will probably not match the values shown
for the inventories.
Important
You can reset inventories manually, and you can stop and start inventories manually. However, if you do this,
data for the current contract period will not reflect the entire 24-hour period. Data for earlier contract periods
is not affected.
•
The contract totals for the current contract period are stored in the Today's Total [1-4] parameters.
•
The contract totals for the previous contract period are stored in the Yesterday's Total [1-4] parameters.
•
The contract totals from earlier contract periods can be read in the totalizer log if configured.
Configuration and Use Manual
169
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Configure contract totals into the totalizer log
The transmitter can be configured to store contract totals to the totalizer log. This allows you to access totals
from earlier contract periods. Otherwise, the transmitter maintains data for only the current contract period
(today) and the immediately preceding contract period (yesterday).
Procedure
1. Navigate to the Totalizer Log.
Option
Description
Display
Menu → Configuration → Totalizer Log
ProLink III
Device Tools → Configuration → Totalizer Log
Field communicator
Not available
2. Set Log Total 1, Log Total 2, Log Total 3, and/or Log Total 4 to the desired contract total.
You can configure the totalizer history log to include both Advanced Phase Measurement and standard
totals.
15.2 Generate service files
The transmitter automatically saves several types of service data that is useful in troubleshooting, device
maintenance, and administration. You can view the data by using ProLink III to generate a service file and then
clicking on the ProcessViz button to view the data, or by using your PC to open the file.
Prerequisites
If you use the first option from step 1, the service port must be enabled. It is enabled by default. However, if
you need to enable it, choose Menu → Configuration → Security and set Service Port to On.
Note
It may take as long as 10 minutes to generate a service file.
Procedure
1.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is
powered up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Perform one of the following tasks:
Option
Description
Service port
Use the USB-C cable to connect to the service port.
2. From ProLink III , select Device Tools → File Transfer → Download Service Files.
3. Click on Download all files. This could take 10 to 15 minutes.
4. If you know which files you would like to download, click Show Additional Options and select the service
files that you want to generate.
170
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Service file
Description
File name
Configuration Audit
Log
All changes to configuration, including changes made
by procedures such as zero calibration or density
calibration. Stores the last 1000 configuration changes.
ConfgAuditLog.txt
Alert History
All occurrences of alerts and conditions, independent
of alert severity. Stores the last 1000 configuration
changes.
AlertLog.txt
Historian: 30 Days
5-minute average values for selected process and
diagnostic variables for the last 30 days.
Concatenated from
transmitter tag
and date
Historian: 1 Day
Values of selected process and diagnostic variables for
the last 24 hours, recorded at 1-second intervals.
Concatenated from
transmitter tag
and date
SMV: 20 Runs
Test data from the 20 most recent SMV tests.
SmvLast20Data.csv
Service Snapshot
An ASCII file containing a snapshot of the transmitter
internal database. This file is used by customer service.
service.dump
Factory Config File
The configuration file created for this transmitter at the
factory.
FactoryConfig.cfg
Assert Log
A troubleshooting file used by customer service.
AssertLog.txt
Security Log
A record of events that might indicate tampering.
SecurityLog.txt
5. Save and specify the folder on the computer where the log file will be saved.
15.2.1 Alert history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all alert occurrences to its internal memory. The alert
history log is an ASCII file.
Contents of alert history
The alert history in the transmitter internal memory contains the 1000 most recent alert records. Each alert
record contains the following information:
•
Name of alert or condition
•
Category:
— F = Failure
— FC = Function Check
— M = Maintenance Required
— OOS = Out of Specification
— I = Ignore
•
Action:
— Active = Transition from inactive to active
— Inactive = Transition from active to inactive
— Toggling = More than 2 transitions in the last 60 seconds
•
Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
Configuration and Use Manual
171
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
— Not displayed if Action = Toggling
Alert history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the 20 most recent records in alert history are retained in the
transmitter internal memory. All earlier records are cleared from internal memory.
Alert history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, alert history is not affected.
15.2.2 Configuration audit history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all configuration events to its internal memory. The
configuration audit log is an ASCII file.
Contents of configuration audit log
The configuration audit log contains a record for every change to transmitter configuration, including changes
resulting from zero calibration, density calibration, etc. Each record contains:
•
Modbus location in transmitter memory
— Cnnn = Coil
— Rnnn = Register
— Rnnn xxx = Array, indexed by register xxx
•
Name of Modbus location
•
Original value
•
New value
•
Measurement unit, if applicable
•
Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
•
Host or protocol from which the change was made
Configuration audit history and power-cycles
If the transmitter is power-cycled or rebooted, the event is logged in the configuration audit history. Earlier
records are not affected.
Configuration audit history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, the event is logged in the configuration
audit history. Earlier records are not affected.
Example: Configuration audit log
====================================================================================
Device UID: 22729F1F
Device Tag: SUPPLY
Addr
Name
Old Value
New Value
Unit
Time Zone: GMT-7:00
Host
====================================================================================
C167
SYS_CfgFile_Re
0
1
09/SEP/2019 11:35:11
Display
C167
SYS_CfgFile_Re
0
0
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
172
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
1167
IO_ChannelB_As
1
4
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
351
SNS_API2540Tab
81
100
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
40
SNS_DensityUni
91
92
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
44
SNS_PressureUn
6
12
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
14
FO_1_Source
0
5
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
1180
MAI_Source
251
55
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
275
MAI_mA20Var
0
250.0
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
68
SYS_Tag
FT-0000
SUPPLY
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
159
SNS_K1
1606.9
1606.4
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
161
SNS_K2
1606.9
7354
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
163
SNS_DensityTem
5.66
4.44
09/SEP/2019 11:35:12
Other
°C
…
Note
The configuration audit log displays only in English.
15.2.3 Assert history and log
The transmitter automatically saves information about all asserts. You can generate an assert log for use by
customer service. The assert log is an ASCII file.
Contents of assert log
The assert history contains the 1000 most recent asserts. An assert is an unusual event in the transmitter
firmware that may indicate an error or malfunction. A list of asserts can be useful for troubleshooting by
customer service. The assert log is not designed for customer use.
Assert history and power-cycles
Assert history is not affected by reboots or power-cycles.
Assert history and configuration files
If you restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file, assert history is not affected.
15.2.4 Security log
Counters are maintained to track the number of illegal configuration change requests, firmware upgrade
failures, and failures to enter the display password. The security log is an ASCII file.
Contents of security log
The security log contains a summary of security events that have occurred since the last transmitter reboot.
The following items are included:
•
Device information
•
Timestamp
— Format: Military time
— Time and time zone: Transmitter clock
•
Number of password entry failures
•
Number of transmitter firmware upgrade failures
Configuration and Use Manual
173
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
•
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Number of database write failures
Security log and power-cycles
If the transmitter is rebooted or power-cycled, the security log is not affected.
174
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
Security log and configuration files
If you attempt to restore the factory configuration or upload a configuration file when write-protection is
enabled, the Database Write Failures counter is increased.
Example: Security log file
TAG:SUPPLY
UID:22729F1F
SW:0045
Device:Config I/O
GMT-7.0 DST:DST Zone:(UTC-7:00) Denver
Addr
Name
DATE:23/SEP/2019 14:42:58
Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5851
Password Failures
0
5852
SW Upgrade Failures
0
5853
Database Write Failures
25636
Note
The security log displays only in English.
Configuration and Use Manual
175
Log files, history files, and service files
May 2024
176
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16 Troubleshooting
16.1 Status LED and device status
The status LED (MOD STATUS) on the transmitter display provides a quick indication of device status by
changing color and flashing. If the transmitter was ordered without a display, the LEDs on the outputs board
inside the transmitter provide the same information.
Table 16-1: Status LED and device status
Status LED condition
Device status
Solid green
No alerts are active.
Solid yellow
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
Solid red
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Auto zero or SMV test in progress
Flashing green
An auto zero is being performed.
Status LED off
Transmitter is not receiving power.
Display is not seated or not functioning properly.
16.2 API Referral troubleshooting
16.2.1 Extrapolation alert is active
Cause
Line pressure, line temperature, or line density is outside the range of the configured API table.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
16.2.2 Inaccurate referred density reading
Cause
•
Inaccurate density measurement
•
Inaccurate temperature measurement
•
Incorrect reference conditions
•
Incorrect API table selection
Recommended actions
1. Verify the line density value.
2. Verify the line temperature value.
3. Ensure that the application is configured to use the appropriate temperature source.
4. Ensure that the pressure source is configured correctly, that the external pressure device is
operating correctly, and that both devices are using the same measurement units.
Configuration and Use Manual
177
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
5. Ensure that reference temperature and reference pressure, if applicable, are configured correctly.
6. Ensure that the selected API table is appropriate for the process fluid.
16.3 Batch troubleshooting
16.3.1 Batch will not start
Cause
•
Previous batch not ended
•
Valve is closed but the transmitter is detecting flow
•
No discrete output configured for batch control
•
Active alarm(s) present
•
Totals were not reset
Recommended actions
1. End the batch.
2. Check for two-phase flow.
3. Verify the zero.
4. Verify the cutoffs.
5. Set up a channel to operate as a discrete output, and configure it for batch control.
16.3.2 Valve operation is backwards
Cause
•
Discrete Output wiring is incorrect
•
Discrete Output polarity is reversed
Recommended actions
1. Verify the wiring between the Discrete Output and the valve. The ON signal must open the valve.
Perform a loop test.
2. Change the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
16.3.3 Valve does not operate
Cause
•
Discrete Output wiring is incorrect.
•
Discrete Output channel is set up for internal power. The discrete output is capable of sourcing only
7 mA. It may be necessary to switch to external power with an external power source and current limiting
resistor.
Recommended actions
1. Verify the wiring between the Discrete Output and the valve. The ON signal must open the valve.
Perform a loop test.
2. Ensure that the channel is wired and configured for external power.
3. Ensure that the valve and channel are powered.
178
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.3.4 Batch totals are inaccurate
Cause
•
Batch target is incorrect
•
AOC is inaccurate
•
Flow measurement needs adjustment
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the correct batch preset is active.
2. Verify that the batch target is set correctly.
3. If you have recently changed the batch target, run a few batches and wait for the AOC value to
adjust.
4. Repeat AOC calibration.
5. Adjust the fixed AOC value.
6. Compare the batch total to a scale reading.
16.3.5 Batch repeat not satisfactory
Cause
•
AOC is inaccurate
•
Inconsistent or leaking valve
•
Process is unstable
Recommended actions
1. Inspect the valve and replace if necessary.
2. Repeat AOC calibration.
3. Ensure that line pressure is stable.
4. Ensure that tank level is approximately constant.
5. Ensure that the pump is not causing unstable flow.
6. If the batch duration is <10 seconds, call Customer Support.
16.4 Concentration measurement troubleshooting
16.4.1 Significantly incorrect CM after loading matrix
Cause
The wrong temperature or density unit was configured when the matrix was loaded.
Recommended actions
Set the temperature and density units to the units used when the matrix was built, then reload the matrix.
For custom matrices, contact customer support.
16.4.2 Inaccurate CM reading
Cause
•
Inaccurate density measurement
Configuration and Use Manual
179
Troubleshooting
May 2024
•
Inaccurate temperature measurement
•
Incorrect reference conditions
•
Incorrect matrix data
•
Inappropriate trim values
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Recommended actions
1. Verify the line density value.
2. Verify the line temperature value.
3. Ensure that the application is configured to use the appropriate temperature source.
4. Ensure that reference temperature is configured correctly.
5. Ensure that the appropriate matrix is active.
6. Ensure that the matrix is configured correctly.
7. Adjust the extrapolation limits for the active matrix.
8. Adjust measurement with a concentration offset trim.
16.5 Alert when connecting a core processor to a remote
1600 Transmitter
When connecting a core processor to a 1600 transmitter, you will see the following alert from the transmitter
display:
Alert
New Core Detected
Cause
A new core processor was detected.
Recommended actions
1. Select one of the following options when prompted by the screen.
180
Option
Description
Action
Core Only Replacement
The new core processor is
replacing an old core processor
and the sensor is not getting
replaced.
The core processor is brand new
without a baseline and has default
factory values, such as K1 = 1000
and K2 = 5000.
Restore configuration and verify
sensor parameters.
Pre-Calibrated Core Replacement
The new core processor is precalibrated and matched with the
sensor.
You are replacing a core processor
that has already been paired with
a sensor that has already been
characterized.
Verify the sensor parameters and
save the configuration.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Option
Description
Action
Not Pre-Calibrated Core
Replacement
The core processor and sensor
are being replaced, but the
core processor has not been precalibrated or matched with the
sensor.
The sensor and core processor
are being replaced but the new
core processor has not been
paired (characterized) with the new
sensor.
Enter the sensor parameters and
save the configuration.
I Don't Know
You do not know if the new core
processor has been pre-calibrated
and matched with the sensor.
Verify the sensor parameters and
save the configuration if there was
a change.
2. Select Continue.
3. Per the screen message, contact Emerson if you have any questions before you select the Finished
button.
These screens will not display again until another new core processor has been detected.
16.6 Density measurement troubleshooting
16.6.1 Erratic density reading
Cause
•
Normal process noise
•
Two-phase flow
•
Line pressure too low
•
The flow rate is too high for the installation
•
Pipe diameter too small
•
Contaminants or suspended solids in the process gas
•
Contaminants or suspended solids in the process fluid
•
Vibration in the pipeline
•
Erosion or corrosion
Recommended actions
1. Check for alerts.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Decrease the flow rate.
4. Check for two-phase flow.
5. Ensure that line pressure or sample pressure meets installation requirements.
6. Increase back pressure to minimize bubble formation.
7. Minimize vibration in the pipeline.
8. Increase the pipe diameter.
9. Install a flow control method (bypass, flow chamber, expander, etc.).
Configuration and Use Manual
181
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
10. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
16.6.2 Inaccurate density reading
Cause
•
Problem with process fluid
•
Incorrect density calibration factors
•
Wiring problem
•
Two-phase flow
•
Plugged or coated sensor tube
•
Incorrect sensor orientation
•
RTD failure
•
Physical characteristics of sensor have changed
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Check the grounding of all components.
3. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
4. Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly. See the sensor tag or the
calibration sheet for your meter.
5. Check for two-phase flow.
6. If two sensors with similar frequency are too near each other, separate them.
7. Purge the sensor tubes.
8. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
16.6.3 Unusually high density reading
Cause
•
Plugged or coated sensor tube
•
Incorrect density calibration factors
•
Inaccurate temperature measurement
•
RTD failure
•
In high-frequency meters, erosion, or corrosion
•
In low-frequency meters, tube fouling
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all of the calibration parameters have been entered correctly.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. Purge the sensor tubes.
3. Check for coating in the flow tubes.
4. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
182
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.6.4 Unusually low density reading
Cause
•
Two-phase flow
•
Incorrect calibration factors
•
In low-frequency meters, erosion or corrosion
Recommended actions
1. Check for alerts, especially Drive Overrange.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration
sheet for your meter.
4. Purge sensor tubes.
5. Check for tube erosion, especially if the process fluid is abrasive.
6. Perform Smart Meter Verification.
16.7 Discrete Output troubleshooting
16.7.1 No Discrete Output
Cause
•
Output not powered
•
Wiring problem
•
Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring if power source is set to external.
2. Verify the output wiring.
3. Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a Discrete Output.
4. Contact customer service.
16.7.2 Loop test failed
Cause
•
Output not powered
•
Power supply problem
•
Wiring problem
•
Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
2. Verify the output wiring.
3. Contact customer service.
Configuration and Use Manual
183
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.7.3 Discrete Output readings reversed
Cause
•
Wiring problem
•
Configuration does not match wiring
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output wiring.
2. Ensure that Discrete Output Polarity is set correctly.
16.8 Flow measurement troubleshooting
16.8.1 Flow rate reported as zero when flow is present
Cause
•
The process condition is below cutoff.
•
Two-phase flow
Recommended action
1. Verify the cutoffs.
2. Check live density against the two-phase flow low and high limits.
16.8.2 Flow indication at no flow conditions or zero offset
Cause
•
Misaligned piping (especially in new installations)
•
Open or leaking valve
•
Incorrect sensor zero
Recommended actions
1. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters.
See the sensor tag or the calibration sheet for your meter.
2. If the reading is not excessively high, review the live zero. You may need to restore the factory zero.
3. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
4. Check for mounting stress on the sensor (e.g., sensor being used to support piping, misaligned
piping).
5. Contact customer service.
16.8.3 Erratic non-zero flow rate at no-flow conditions
Cause
•
Leaking valve or seal
•
Two-phase flow
•
Cutoff set to zero
•
Incorrect sensor orientation
184
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Wiring problem
•
Vibration in pipeline at rate close to sensor tube frequency
•
Damping value too low
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
See the installation manual for your sensor.
2. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
3. If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes either a 4-wire or a 9-wire segment,
verify that all the cable shields are correctly grounded.
4. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
5. Verify zero after reviewing all of the above. If an auto is recommended, do so ONCE as close to
normal operating conditions as possible.
6. Check cutoffs and enter an appropriate nonzero value.
7. For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
8. Purge the sensor tubes.
9. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
10. Check for sources of vibration.
11. Verify damping configuration.
12. Check for two-phase flow.
13. Check for radio frequency interference.
14. Contact customer service.
16.8.4 Erratic non-zero flow rate when flow is steady
Cause
•
Two-phase flow
•
Damping value too low
•
Moisture in sensor or transmitter junction box
•
Wiring problem
•
Problem with receiving device
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application.
See the installation manual for your sensor.
2. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
3. If the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter includes either a 4-wire or a 9-wire segment,
verify that all the cable shields are correctly grounded.
4. Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
5. Perform a zero verification.
6. Verify measurement unit selection.
7. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
8. For sensors with a junction box, check for moisture in the junction box.
9. Purge the sensor tubes.
Configuration and Use Manual
185
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
10. Check for open or leaking valves or seals.
11. Check for sources of vibration.
12. Verify damping configuration.
13. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
14. Check for two-phase flow.
15. Check for radio frequency interference.
16. Contact customer service.
16.8.5 Inaccurate flow rate
Cause
•
Wiring problem
•
Inappropriate measurement unit
•
Incorrect process variable selection
•
Incorrect measurement units
•
Incorrect flow calibration factor
•
Incorrect meter factor
•
Incorrect density calibration factors
•
Incorrect grounding
•
Two-phase flow
•
Problem with receiving device
•
Incorrect sensor zero
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
3. Verify all of the characterization or calibration parameters. See the sensor tag or the calibration
sheet for your meter.
4. Zero the meter.
5. Check the grounding of all components.
6. Check for two-phase flow.
7. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
8. Check the sensor coils for electrical shorts. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
9. Replace the core processor or transmitter.
16.9 Frequency Output troubleshooting
16.9.1 No Frequency Output
Cause
•
Stopped totalizer
•
Process condition below cutoff
186
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
•
Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Internal Zero or Downscale
•
Two-phase flow
•
Flow in reverse direction from configured flow direction parameter
•
Frequency Output Direction not set correctly
•
Bad frequency receiving device
•
Output level not compatible with receiving device
•
Bad output circuit
•
Output not powered
•
Wiring problem
•
Channel not configured for desired output
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the process conditions are below the low-flow cutoff. Reconfigure the low-flow cutoff if
necessary.
2. Check the Fault Action settings.
3. Verify that the totalizers are not stopped. A stopped totalizer will cause the Frequency Output to be
locked.
4. Check for two-phase flow.
5. Check flow direction.
6. Check the direction parameters.
7. Verify expected frequency output signal using ProLink or by navigating to Service Tools → Service
Data → View I/O levels.
8. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
9. Verify that the channel is wired and configured as a Frequency Output.
10. Perform a loop test with a multimeter or frequency counter.
16.9.2 Consistently incorrect Frequency Output measurement
Cause
•
Output not scaled correctly
•
Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
Recommended actions
1. Check the scaling of the Frequency Output.
2. Verify that the measurement units are configured correctly for your application.
16.9.3 Erratic Frequency Output
Cause
There is Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) from the environment.
Recommended action
Check for radio frequency interference.
Configuration and Use Manual
187
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.9.4 Frequency Output goes in and out of fault conditions
Cause
There is a problem with the interaction between the Output Saturated alert and the fault action configured for
the output.
Recommended actions
1. Change the severity of the Output Saturated alert from Fault to another option.
2. Configure the transmitter to ignore the Output Saturated alert or the relevant conditions.
3. Change the configuration of Fault Action from Downscale to another option.
16.10 mA Output troubleshooting
16.10.1 No mA Output
Cause
•
Output not powered
•
Power supply problem
•
Wiring problem
•
Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. If applicable, check the output wiring to verify that the output is powered.
2. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
3. Verify the output wiring.
4. Check the Fault Action settings.
5. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
6. Measure DC voltage across output terminals to verify that the output is active.
7. Contact customer service.
16.10.2 Loop test failed
Cause
•
Output not powered
•
Power supply problem
•
Wiring problem
•
Circuit failure
Recommended actions
1. Check the power supply and power supply wiring.
2. Verify the output wiring.
3. Check the Fault Action settings.
4. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
5. Contact customer service.
188
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.10.3 mAO below 4 mA
Cause
•
Output not powered
•
Open in wiring
•
Bad output circuit
•
Process condition below LRV
•
LRV and URV are not set correctly
•
Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Internal Zero or Downscale
•
Bad mA receiving device
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify the receiving device, and the wiring between the transmitter and the receiving device.
3. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value.
4. Check the Fault Action settings.
5. Verify channel configuration for the affected mA Output.
16.10.4 Constant mAO
Cause
•
Incorrect process variable assigned to the output
•
Fault condition exists
•
A loop test is in progress
•
Zero calibration failure
•
mA Output Direction not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output variable assignments.
2. View and resolve any existing alert conditions.
3. Check the direction parameters.
4. Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
5. If related to a zero calibration failure, reboot or power-cycle the transmitter and retry the zeroing
procedure.
16.10.5 mAO consistently out of range
Cause
•
Incorrect process variable or units assigned to output
•
Fault condition if Fault Action is set to Upscale or Downscale
•
LRV and URV are not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Verify the output variable assignments.
Configuration and Use Manual
189
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2. Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
3. Check the Fault Action settings.
4. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value.
5. Check the mA Output trim.
16.10.6 Consistently incorrect mA measurement
Cause
•
Loop problem
•
Incorrect measurement unit configured for process variable
•
Incorrect process variable configured
•
LRV and URV are not set correctly
•
mA Output Direction not set correctly
Recommended actions
1. Check the mA Output trim.
2. Verify the measurement units configured for the output.
3. Verify the process variable assigned to the mA Output.
4. Check the direction parameters.
16.10.7 mAO correct at lower current, but incorrect at higher current
Cause
The mA loop resistance may be set too high.
Recommended actions
Verify that the mA Output load resistance is below the maximum supported load.
See the installation manual for your transmitter.
16.10.8 mAO goes in and out of fault conditions
Cause
There is a problem with the interaction between the Output Saturated alert and the fault action configured for
the output.
Recommended actions
1. Identify and resolve the fault.
2. Verify that the mA Output load resistance is below the maximum supported load (600 ohms).
3. Configure the transmitter to ignore the Output Saturated alert or the relevant conditions.
4. Change the configuration of Fault Action from Downscale to another option.
16.11 Status alerts, causes, and recommendations
Not all of these alerts may apply to your type of transmitter.
190
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.11.1 [002] RAM Error (Core Processor)
Alert
Fault - Electronics failed - Core ROM/RAM failure [002]
Cause
There is an internal memory problem with the core processor. This alert will not clear until you reboot or
power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
2. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly
terminated.
3. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
4. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the
transmitter or wiring as necessary.
5. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
6. Replace the core processor.
16.11.2 [003] Sensor Failed
Alert
Sensor Failed
Cause
Recommended actions
1. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
3. Check the sensor coils to ensure the resistance readings are within specific sensor specifications.
Contact Customer Support for specific sensor resistance values. If you find problems, replace the
sensor.
4. Check the integrity of the sensor tubes.
5. Ensure that the sensor is completely full or completely empty.
6. Replace the sensor.
7. Contact customer service.
16.11.3 [005] Mass Flow Rate Overrange
Alert
Extreme Primary Purpose Variable
Cause
The measured flow is outside the sensor's flow limits.
Recommended actions
1. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
2. Verify that the transmitter is configured correctly for the connected sensor.
3. Check for two-phase flow.
Configuration and Use Manual
191
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Refer to Check for two-phase flow (slug flow).
4. Ensure the lower puck is seated to sensor feedthrough or junction box.
5. Contact customer service.
16.11.4 [008] Density Overrange
Alert
Density Overrange
Cause
•
Tubes plugged
•
Incorrect density calibration parameters
•
Two-phase flow
Recommended actions
1. If other alerts are present, resolve those alert conditions first.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Check for two-phase flow by checking for two-phase alerts. If two-phase flow is the problem, alerts
will be posted.
4. Contact customer service.
16.11.5 [009] Transmitter Initializing
Alert
Transmitter Initializing
Cause
•
The transmitter is in power-up mode.
•
Insufficient DC startup current.
Recommended actions
1. Allow the meter to complete its power-up sequence. The alert should clear automatically.
2. Verify that the DC power supply current is sufficiently rated for the device.
16.11.6 [010] Calibration Failed
Alert
Calibration Failure
Cause
The calibration failed.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that your calibration procedure meets the documented requirements.
2. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
3. Retry the procedure. If it still fails, contact Customer Support.
192
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.11.7 [016] Sensor Temperature (RTD) Failure
Alert
Sensor Failed
Cause
•
The value computed for the resistance of the line RTD is outside limits.
•
Open RTD or LLC
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a) Refer to the installation manual and ensure that the wiring has been performed according to
instructions. Obey all applicable safety messages.
b) Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c) Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to case. If you find problems, replace
the sensor.
d) Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Check the feedthrough pins. Contact customer service for assistance. If you find problems, replace
the sensor.
4. Check the junction box for moisture, corrosion or oxidation.
5. Contact customer service.
16.11.8 [017] Sensor Case Temperature (RTD) Failure
Alert
Sensor Failed
Cause
•
The values computed for the resistance of the meter and case RTDs are outside limits.
•
Open RTD
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
a) Refer to the installation manual and ensure that the wiring has been performed according to
instructions. Obey all applicable safety messages.
b) Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
c) Perform RTD resistance checks and check for shorts to case. If you find problems, replace
the sensor.
d) Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Contact customer service.
Configuration and Use Manual
193
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.11.9 [018] EEPROM Error (Transmitter)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is an internal memory problem with the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
Important
This alert will not clear until you cycle power to the meter.
2. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
3. Ensure that all wire connections are tight.
4. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly
terminated.
5. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
6. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the
transmitter or wiring as necessary.
7. If the alert persists, replace the transmitter.
8. Contact Customer Service.
16.11.10 [019] RAM Error (Transmitter)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a ROM checksum mismatch in the transmitter or the RAM address location cannot be written in the
transmitter. This alert will not clear until you reboot or power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
2. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
3. Ensure that all wire connections are tight.
4. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly
terminated.
5. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
6. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the
transmitter or wiring as necessary.
7. If the alert persists, contact Customer Service.
16.11.11 [020] Calibration Factors Missing
Alert
Configuration Error
194
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Cause
Some calibration factors have not been entered or are incorrect.
Recommended actions
1. Verify characterization parameters (specifically Flow Cal Factor and K1 values). Refer to Characterize
the meter (if required) .
2. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
3. If Sensor Type = Curved Tube, ensure that no parameters specific to Straight Tube have been set.
4. Check the feedthrough pins. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
Contact customer service for assistance.
5. Check the core processor housing for moisture, corrosion, or verdigris.
6. Check the junction box for moisture, corrosion, or verdigris.
7. Check the sensor coils for electrical shorts. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
16.11.12 [021] Incorrect Sensor Type
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
Transmitter verification of sensor circuits and characterization has produced a discrepancy. The transmitter
cannot operate the sensor.
Recommended actions
1. Verify the setting of the Sensor Type parameter.
2. Verify characterization parameters (specifically Flow Cal Factor and K1 values). Refer to Characterize
the meter (if required) .
3. Contact customer service.
16.11.13 [022] Configuration Database Corrupt
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a NVM checksum mismatch in the core processor's configuration memory.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
2. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the
transmitter or wiring as necessary.
3. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
4. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly
terminated.
5. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from either 4-wire or the 9-wire cable are all properly landed.
6. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
Configuration and Use Manual
195
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
7. If the alert persists, replace the lower puck.
16.11.14 [024] Program Corrupt (Core Processor)
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
There is a checksum mismatch in the core processor's program section.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
2. Evaluate the environment for sources of high electromagnetic interference (EMI) and relocate the
transmitter or wiring as necessary.
3. Ensure that all wiring compartment covers are installed correctly.
4. Ensure that all transmitter wiring meets specifications and that all cable shields are properly
terminated.
5. Check the drain wires.
a) Verify that the drain wires from either 4-wire or the 9-wire cable are all properly landed.
6. Ensure that all meter components are grounded properly.
7. If the alert persists, replace the lower puck.
16.11.15 [026] Sensor/Transmitter Communications Failure
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The transmitter has lost communication with the core processor, or there have been too many
communications errors.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Verify the power to both the transmitter and core processor.
3. Cycle power to the transmitter.
4. If the problem persists, contact customer support.
16.11.16 [028] Core Process Write Failure
Alert
Core Process Write Failure
Cause
A write to the core processor failed.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
2. Contact customer service about servicing or replacing the core processor or transmitter.
196
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.11.17 [030] Incorrect Board Type
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The firmware or configuration loaded in the transmitter is incompatible with the board type.
Recommended actions
1. If this alarm occurred in conjunction with an effort to load a configuration into the transmitter,
confirm that the transmitter is of the same model as the one the configuration came from.
2. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter to see if the alert clears.
3. If the problem persists, contact customer service.
16.11.18 [031] Low Power
Alert
Core Low Power
Cause
The enhanced core processor is not receiving sufficient power. This alert will not clear until you reboot or
power cycle the transmitter.
Recommended actions
1. Check the wiring between the sensor and the transmitter.
2. Measure the voltage at the core processor terminals and ensure that it is receiving a minimum of
11.5 volts at all times. If it is not, verify the power wiring to the transmitter.
3. Verify that the transmitter is receiving sufficient power.
a) If it is not, correct the problem and reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
b) If it is, this suggests that the transmitter has an internal power issue. Replace the
transmitter.
16.11.19 [033] Insufficient Pickoff Signal
Alert
Tube Not Full
Cause
The signal from the sensor pickoffs is insufficient for operation (enhanced core processor only).
Recommended actions
1. Check for two-phase flow.
2. Check the sensor tubes for plugging or coating.
3. Check for shorts to the sensor case. See Check the sensor coils, Step 4.
4. Check for fluid separation by monitoring the density value and comparing the results against
expected density values.
5. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application. Settling from a two-phase or
three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
Configuration and Use Manual
197
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.11.20 [034] Smart Meter Verification Failed
Alert
Function Check Failed and Smart Meter Verification Failed
Cause
The current Smart Meter Verification value is statistically different than the factory baseline value.
Recommended actions
1. Minimize process instability and repeat the test.
2. Contact Customer Service.
16.11.21 [035] Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Alert
Function Check Failed and Smart Meter Verification Aborted
Cause
The Smart Meter Verification test did not complete, possibly because it was manually aborted or because
process conditions were too unstable.
Recommended actions
1. Minimize process instability and repeat the test.
2. Check the Smart Meter Verification abort code and take appropriate steps.
3. Contact customer service.
Table 16-2: SMV aborts code
198
Abort code
Abort reason
Abort recommendation
1
Manual abort by end user
Not available
2
SMV timeout
Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
3
Pickoff Voltage low
Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
4
Temperature unstable
Ensure temperature is stable. Start again.
5
Cal state in progress
Not available
6
Unused
Not available
7
Drive loop AGC reported an amplitude error
Check status of pickoff and drive coils.
8
High flow (dt) standard deviation
Reduce flow rate and start again.
9
High flow (dt) mean value
Reduce flow rate and start again.
10
State in progress
Not available
11
Verification complete
Not available
12
Transmitter in fault
Clear alarms before proceeding.
13
No factory air verification
Perform factory calibration on air.
14
No factory water verification
Perform factory calibration on water.
15
Drive frequency drift from carrier frequency
Ensure temperature, flow, and density are
stable. Start again.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.11.22 [102] Drive Overrange
Alert
Drive Over-Range
Cause
The drive power (current/ voltage) is at its maximum.
Recommended actions
1. Verify that the tubes are full of process fluid.
2. Check flow, density and temperature against the values reported by the device.
3. For liquid applications, check for partially filled tubes. For gas applications, check for condensate,
compressor oil, etc.
4. Check for foreign material in the tubes, coating on tube walls, or other process problems.
5. Check the drive gain and the pickoff voltage.
Refer to Check the pickoff voltage.
6. Check sensor coil resistance readings. If you find problems, replace the sensor.
Refer to Check for internal electrical problems.
7. Ensure that the sensor orientation is appropriate for your application. Check your sensor
installation manual for proper orientation.
Settling from a two-phase or three-phase fluid can cause this alert even if the flow tubes are full.
16.11.23 [104] Calibration in Progress
Alert
Function Check in Progress
Cause
A calibration is running.
Recommended actions
Allow the test to complete.
16.11.24 [105] Two-Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
Recommended actions
Check for two-phase flow.
Refer to Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) for an mA Output.
16.11.25 [110] Frequency Output 1 Saturated
Alert
Output Saturated
Configuration and Use Manual
199
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Cause
The calculated output value is outside the range of the output.
Recommended actions
1. Check the scaling of the Frequency Output.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Ensure that both devices are using the same measurement unit.
4. Purge the sensor tubes.
16.11.26 [111] Frequency Output 1 Fixed
Alert
Output Fixed
Cause
The output is configured to send a constant value. A frequency output test is in progress.
Recommended actions
Check to see if a frequency output test is in progress. If so, unfix the output.
16.11.27 [116] Temperature Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line temperature is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process temperature is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
16.11.28 [117] Density Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line density is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process density is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
16.11.29 [118] Discrete Output 1 Fixed
Alert
Output Fixed
200
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Cause
The output is set to a constant state. An output test is in progress.
Recommended actions
Check to see if an output test is in progress. If so, unfix it.
16.11.30 [120] Curve Fit Failure (Concentration)
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
One or more errors in the concentration curve input
Recommended actions
1. Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
2. Ensure the density and temperature units match those that the curve was written in.
3. Contact customer service.
16.11.31 [121] Extrapolation Alert (Concentration)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The line density or line temperature is outside the range of the concentration matrix plus the configured
extrapolation limit.
Recommended actions
1. Verify the configuration of the concentration measurement application.
2. Ensure the live density and temperature readings fall within limits of the matrix being used.
16.11.32 [123] Pressure Overrange (API Referral)
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The external line pressure is outside the range of the API table.
Recommended actions
1. Ensure that process pressure is within the range of the API table.
2. Verify the configuration of the API Referral application and related parameters.
3. Ensure the transmitter's external pressure engineering unit matches that of the actual external
pressure device.
Configuration and Use Manual
201
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.11.33 [131] Smart Meter Verification in Progress
Alert
Function Check in Progress
Cause
A Smart Meter Verification test is running. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Recommended actions
Allow the test to complete.
16.11.34 [132] Sensor Simulation Active
Alert
Sensor Being Simulated
Cause
Sensor simulation mode is enabled.
Recommended actions
Disable sensor simulation.
16.11.35 [138] Transient Bubble Remediation (TBR) Active
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
Drive gain is above the configured threshold and transient bubble remediation is active.
Recommended actions
Check for air entrainment, tube fouling, flashing, or tube damage.
16.11.36 Batcher Not Configured
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
One or more of the following has occurred:
•
No flow source has been configured for the batcher application
•
The batch target is 0
•
No Discrete Output is assigned to batch control
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the batcher application and related parameters.
202
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.11.37 Batch Time Out
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The batch exceeded Maximum Batch Time, and ended before the target was reached.
Recommended actions
Verify the configuration of the batcher application and related parameters.
16.11.38 Clock Failure
Alert
Maintenance required - Configuration warning - Clock constant
Cause
The transmitter real-time clock is not incrementing.
Recommended actions
1. Contact customer service.
2. Replace hardware board.
16.11.39 Core Processor Update Failed
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The core processor software update failed.
Recommended actions
1. Resolve any active alerts.
2. Check connection between the upper and lower pucks.
3. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter, then retry the procedure. If it still fails, replace the
transmitter.
4. Contact customer service.
16.11.40 mA Output Fixed
Alert
Function check - output fixed - [114] mA output fixed
Cause
The output is configured to send a constant value. A loop test may be in progress.
Non-zero HART multidrop address
Recommended actions
1. Check to see if a loop test is in process (the output is fixed).
Configuration and Use Manual
203
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2. Exit mA Output trim, if applicable.
3. Reset HART multidrop address to zero.
4. Cycle power.
16.11.41 mA Output Saturated
Alert
Out of specification - output saturated - mA output saturated [100 or 113]
Cause
The calculated output value is outside the range of the output.
Recommended actions
1. Check the settings of Upper Range Value and Lower Range Value.
Refer to Configure Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range Value (URV) for an mA Output.
2. Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
3. Ensure that both devices are using the same measurement unit.
4. Purge the sensor tubes.
16.11.42 Enhanced Event X Active
Alert
Out of specification - Event active - Discrete event X active
Cause
The conditions assigned to any enhanced event (Enhanced Event 1 through Enhanced Event 5) are present.
Recommended actions
1. If this is an accurate indication of process conditions, no action is required. The alert will clear when
the process returns to normal.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
16.11.43 Event X Active
Alert
Out of specification - Event active - Event X active [108, 109]
Cause
The conditions assigned to either Basic Event 1 or Basic Event 2 are present.
Recommended actions
1. If this is an accurate indication of process conditions, no action is required. The alert will clear when
the process returns to normal.
2. Review event configuration if you believe the event was triggered erroneously.
16.11.44 Moderate Two Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
204
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Cause
The transmitter has detected moderate two-phase flow.
Recommended actions
Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
16.11.45 No Permanent License
Alert
Configuration warning
Cause
A permanent license has not been installed in the transmitter firmware.
Recommended actions
1. If you have a permanent license, install it.
2. If you do not have a permanent license, contact customer service.
16.11.46 Password Not Set
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
Display security has been enabled but the display password has not been changed from the default value.
Recommended actions
Configure a password or disable display security.
16.11.47 Severe Two Phase Flow
Alert
Process Aberration
Cause
The transmitter has detected severe two-phase flow.
Recommended actions
Check your process conditions against the values reported by the device.
16.11.48 Time Not Entered
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The system time has not been entered. The system time is required for diagnostic logs.
Recommended actions
Set the system time.
Configuration and Use Manual
205
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
16.11.49 Transmitter Software Update Failed
Alert
Configuration Error
Cause
The transmitter software update failed.
Recommended actions
1. Reboot or power-cycle the transmitter.
2. Retry the procedure.
3. Contact customer service.
16.11.50 Watchdog Error
Alert
Electronics Failed
Cause
The watchdog timer has expired.
Recommended actions
The transmitter will power cycle when a watchdog error is detected and will increment the watchdog error
count. If this happens multiple times, contact customer support.
16.12 Check the cutoffs
If the transmitter cutoffs are configured incorrectly, the transmitter may report zero flow when flow is present,
or very small amounts of flow under no-flow conditions. The cutoff is considered an absolute value for
reporting positive or negative flow.
Procedure
Verify the configuration of all cutoffs.
16.13 Check the direction parameters
If the direction parameters are set incorrectly, flow rate may be reported as reverse when it is actually
forward, or vice versa. Totalizers and inventories may increment when they should decrement, or vice versa.
The reported flow rate and flow totals depend on the interaction of four factors: the flow direction arrow on
the sensor, actual flow direction, the Sensor Flow Direction Arrow parameter, the Direction parameter for the
mA output or the frequency output, and the Totalizer Direction parameter.
Procedure
1. Ensure that Sensor Flow Direction Arrow is set correctly for your sensor installation and your process.
2. Verify the configuration of mA Output Direction, Frequency Output Direction, and Totalizer Direction.
206
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.14 Check the drive gain
Excessive or erratic drive gain may indicate any of a variety of process conditions or sensor problems.
To know whether your drive gain is excessive or erratic, you must collect drive gain data during the problem
condition and compare it to drive gain data from a period of normal operation.
Excessive (saturated) drive gain
Table 16-3: Possible causes and recommended actions for excessive (saturated) drive gain
Possible cause
Recommended actions
Bent sensor tube
Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage). If either of them are close to zero
(but neither is zero), the sensor tubes may be bent. The sensor will need to be replaced.
Cracked sensor tube
Replace the sensor.
Flow rate out of range
Verify calibration factors are correct.
Open drive or pickoff
sensor coil
Contact customer support.
Over-pressurized tubes
Replace the sensor.
Plugged sensor tube
A dull, audible hum, and unusually high sensor vibration is usually accompanied by high,
even saturated, drive gain. Check the pickoff voltages (see Check the pickoff voltage). If either
of them are close to zero (but neither is zero), plugged tubes may be the source of your
problem. Purge the tubes. In extreme cases, you may need to replace the sensor.
Sensor case full of process
fluid
Replace the sensor.
Sensor imbalance
Contact customer support.
Sensor tubes not
completely full
Correct process conditions so that the sensor tubes are full.
Two-phase flow
Check for two-phase flow. See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow).
Vibrating element not free
to vibrate
Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate.
Erratic drive gain
Table 16-4: Possible causes and recommended actions for erratic drive gain
Possible cause
Recommended actions
Foreign material caught in sensor
tubes
•
Purge the sensor tubes.
•
Replace the sensor.
Internal sensor damage
Replace the sensor.
16.15 Check for internal electrical problems
Shorts between sensor terminals or between the sensor terminals and the sensor case can cause the sensor to
report false or erroneous readings.
Possible cause
Recommended action
Moisture inside the sensor junction box
Ensure that the junction box is dry and no corrosion is
present.
Liquid or moisture inside the sensor case
Contact customer support.
Configuration and Use Manual
207
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Possible cause
Recommended action
Internally shorted feedthrough
Contact customer support.
Faulty cable
Replace the cable.
Improper wire termination
Verify wire terminations inside the sensor junction box.
See Micro Motion 9-Wire Flowmeter Cable Preparation and
Installation Manual.
Shorts to the housing created by trapped or damaged wires
Contact customer support.
Loose wires or connectors
Contact customer support.
Liquid or moisture inside the housing
Contact customer support.
16.16 Check Frequency Output Fault Action
The Frequency Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the Frequency Output if the transmitter
encounters an internal fault condition. If the Frequency Output is reporting a constant value, the transmitter
may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its
behavior, change the setting of Frequency Output Fault Action.
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
16.17 Check the scaling of the Frequency Output
If the process variable assigned to the Frequency Output goes to a value that would set the Frequency Output
to a signal below 0 Hz or above 12500 Hz, the meter will post an Output Saturated alert for the affected
output, then perform the configured fault action.
Procedure
1. Record your current process conditions.
2. Adjust the scaling of the Frequency Output.
16.18 Check grounding
A 9-wire remote mount transmitter and sensor must be grounded.
Prerequisites
You will need an:
•
Installation manual for your sensor
•
Installation manual for your transmitter (remote-mount installations only)
Procedure
Refer to the sensor and transmitter installation manuals for grounding requirements and instructions.
208
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
16.19 Perform transmitter output tests
A loop test is a way to verify that the transmitter and the remote device are communicating properly. A loop
test also helps you know whether you need to trim mA Outputs.
Prerequisites
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
16.19.1 Perform a mA loop test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing an mA loop test, configure Channel B as an mA Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulation and select the mA Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to 4.
3. Start the simulation.
4. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the
discrepancy by trimming the output.
5. Choose New Value.
6. Set Simulation Value to 20.
7. Start the simulation.
8. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the
discrepancy by trimming the output.
9. Choose Exit.
Postrequisites
•
If the mA Output readings are within 200 microamps of each other, you can correct this discrepancy by
trimming the output.
•
If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 200 microamps, or if at any step the
reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
•
You must end the test. It will not time out by itself. A power cycle will also end the test.
16.19.2 Perform a Frequency Output test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a Frequency Output test, configure Channel B as a Frequency Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulation and select the Frequency Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to 1.
Configuration and Use Manual
209
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
3. Start the simulation.
4. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
5. Choose New Value.
6. Set Simulation Value to 14500.
7. Start the simulation.
8. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
9. Choose Exit.
16.19.3 Perform a Discrete Output test using the display
Prerequisites
Before performing a Discrete Output test, configure Channel B as a Discrete Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → Output Simulator and select the Discrete Output.
2. Set Simulation Value to ON.
3. Start the simulation.
4. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
5. Choose New Value.
6. Set Simulation Value to OFF.
7. Start the simulation.
8. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
9. Choose Exit.
Postrequisites
•
If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
•
You must end the test. It will not time out by itself. A power cycle will also end the test.
16.19.4 Perform an mA loop test using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing an mA loop test, configure Channel B as an mA Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing and select the mA Output test.
2. Enter 4 in Fix to:.
3. Select Fix mA.
4. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the
discrepancy by trimming the output.
5. Enter 20 in Fix to:.
6. Select Fix mA.
210
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
7. Read the mA current at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
The readings do not need to match exactly. If the values are slightly different, you can correct the
discrepancy by trimming the output.
8. Select UnFix mA.
Postrequisites
•
If the mA Output readings are within 20 microamps of each other, you can correct this discrepancy by
trimming the output.
•
If the discrepancy between the mA Output readings is greater than 20 microamps, or if at any step the
reading was faulty, verify the wiring between the transmitter and the remote device, and try again.
•
You must end the test. It will not time out by itself. A power cycle will also end the test.
16.19.5 Perform a Frequency Output test using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a Frequency Output test, configure Channel B as a Frequency Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing and select the Frequency Output test.
2. Enter the Frequency Output value in Fix to.
3. Select Fix FO.
4. Read the frequency signal at the receiving device and compare it to the transmitter output.
5. Select UnFix FO.
Postrequisites
You must end the test. It will not time out by itself. A power cycle will also end the test.
16.19.6 Perform a Discrete Output tests using ProLink III
Prerequisites
Before performing a Discrete Output test, configure Channel B as a Discrete Output.
Follow appropriate procedures to ensure that testing will not interfere with existing measurement and control
loops.
Procedure
1. Choose Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Discrete Output Test.
2. If your transmitter is configured for two or more Discrete Outputs, determine which Discrete Output
you want to test.
3. Set Fix To: to ON.
4. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
5. Set Fix To: to OFF.
6. Verify the signal at the receiving device.
7. Select UnFix.
Postrequisites
•
If the Discrete Output readings are reversed, check the setting of Discrete Output Polarity.
Configuration and Use Manual
211
Troubleshooting
May 2024
•
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
You must end the test. It will not time out by itself. A power cycle will also end the test.
16.20 Check Lower Range Value and Upper Range Value
If the process variable assigned to the mA Output falls below the configured Lower Range Value (LRV) or rises
above the configured Upper Range Value (URV), the meter will post an Output Saturated alert for the affected
output, then perform the configured fault action.
Procedure
1. Record your current process conditions.
2. Check the configuration of the LRV and URV.
16.21 Check mA Output Fault Action
The mA Output Fault Action controls the behavior of the mA Output if the transmitter encounters an internal
fault condition. If the mA Output is reporting a constant value below 4 mA or above 20 mA, the transmitter
may be in a fault condition.
Procedure
1. Check the status alerts for active fault conditions.
2. If there are active fault conditions, the transmitter is performing correctly. If you want to change its
behavior, change the setting of mA Output Fault Action.
3. If there are no active fault conditions, continue troubleshooting.
16.22 Trim mA Output
Trimming an mA Output calibrates the transmitter mA Output to the receiving device. If the current trim value
is inaccurate, the transmitter will under-compensate or over-compensate the output.
16.22.1 Trim an mA Output using the display
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device
that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
Procedure
1. Choose Menu → Service Tools → mA Output Trim → mA Output 1.
2. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
3. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than −20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps,
contact customer service.
16.22.2 Trim mA Output using ProLink III
Trimming the mA Output establishes a common measurement range between the transmitter and the device
that receives the mA Output.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the mA Output is wired to the receiving device that will be used in production.
212
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Procedure
1. Follow the instructions in the guided method.
2. Check the trim results. If any trim result is less than −20 microamps or greater than +20 microamps,
contact customer service.
16.23 Check HART communications
If you cannot establish or maintain HART communications, or if the primary mA Output is producing a fixed
value, you may have a wiring problem or a HART configuration problem.
Prerequisites
You may need one or more of the following:
•
The installation manual for your transmitter
•
A field communicator
•
A voltmeter
•
Optional: The HART Application Guide.
Procedure
1. Verify the HART address.
Tip
The default HART address is 0. This is the recommended value unless the device is in a multidrop
network.
2. If the primary mA Output is producing a fixed value of 4 mA, ensure that mA Output Action (Loop
Current Mode) is enabled.
For all HART addresses except 0, mA Output Action must be enabled to allow the primary mA Output to
report process data.
3. Refer to the wiring diagrams in the installation manual and verify that the primary mA Output is
correctly wired for HART support.
16.24 Check the pickoff voltage
If the pickoff voltage readings are unusually low, you may have any of a variety of process or equipment
problems.
To know whether your pickoff voltage is unusually low, you must collect pickoff voltage data during the
problem condition and compare it to pickoff voltage data from a period of normal operation.
Drive gain and pickoff voltage are inversely proportional. As drive gain increases, pickoff voltages decrease
and vice versa.
Table 16-5: Possible causes and recommended actions for low pickoff voltage
Possible cause
Recommended actions
Faulty wiring runs between the sensor and transmitter
Verify wiring between sensor and transmitter.
Process flow rate beyond the limits of the sensor
Verify that the process flow rate is not out of range of the
sensor.
Configuration and Use Manual
213
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 16-5: Possible causes and recommended actions for low pickoff voltage (continued)
Possible cause
Recommended actions
Sensor tubes are not vibrating
•
Check for plugging or deposition.
•
Ensure that the vibrating element is free to vibrate (no
mechanical binding).
•
Verify wiring.
Moisture in the sensor electronics
Eliminate the moisture in the sensor electronics.
The sensor is damaged
Replace the sensor.
Two-phase flow
Ensure the sensor tubes are full.
16.25 Check power supply wiring
If the power supply wiring is damaged or improperly connected, the transmitter may not receive enough
power to operate properly.
Prerequisites
•
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Use a voltmeter to test the voltage at the transmitter power supply terminals.
• If the voltage is within the specified range, you do not have a power supply problem.
2.
•
If the voltage is low, ensure that the power supply is adequate at the source, the power cable is
sized correctly, there is no damage to the power cable, and an appropriate fuse is installed.
•
If there is no power, continue with this procedure.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to
do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
Before inspecting the power supply wiring, disconnect the power source.
3. Ensure that the terminals, wires, and wiring compartment are clean and dry.
4. Ensure that the power supply wires are connected to the correct terminals.
5. Ensure that the power supply wires are making good contact, and are not clamped to the wire
insulation.
6.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not reapply power to the transmitter with the housing
cover removed. Reapplying power to the transmitter while the housing cover is removed could cause
an explosion.
Reapply power to the transmitter.
7. Test the voltage at the terminals.
If there is no power, contact customer service.
16.26 Check for radio frequency interference (RFI)
The transmitter Frequency Output or Discrete Output can be affected by radio frequency interference (RFI).
Possible sources of RFI include a source of radio emissions, or a large transformer, pump, or motor that can
214
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
generate a strong electromagnetic field. Several methods to reduce RFI are available. Use one or more of the
following suggestions, as appropriate to your installation.
Procedure
•
Use shielded cable between the output and the receiving device.
— Terminate the shielding at the receiving device. If this is impossible, terminate the shielding at the cable
gland or conduit fitting.
— Do not terminate the shielding inside the wiring compartment.
— 360-degree termination of shielding is unnecessary.
•
Eliminate the RFI source.
•
Move the transmitter.
16.27 Checking process variables
Micro Motion suggests that you make a record of the process variables listed below, under normal operating
conditions. This list will help you recognize when the process variables are usually high or low.
•
Flow rate
•
Density
•
Temperature
•
Tube frequency
•
Pickoff voltage
•
Drive gain
For troubleshooting, check the process variables under both normal flow and tubes-full no-flow conditions.
Except for flow rate, you should see little or no change between flow and no-flow conditions. If you see a
significant difference, record the values and contact customer service for assistance.
Unusual values for process variables may indicate a variety of different problems. The following table lists
several possible problems and suggested remedies.
Table 16-6: Process variables problems and remedies
Symptom
Cause
Suggested remedy
Steady non-zero flow rate
under no-flow conditions
Misaligned piping
(especially in new installations)
Correct the piping.
Open or leaking valve
Check or correct the valve mechanism.
Bad sensor zero
Rezero the flow meter. See Zero the meter.
Configuration and Use Manual
215
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 16-6: Process variables problems and remedies (continued)
Symptom
Cause
Suggested remedy
Erratic non-zero flow rate
under no-flow conditions
Leaking valve or seal
Check pipeline
Slug flow
See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow).
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes.
Incorrect sensor orientation
Sensor orientation must be appropriate to the
process fluid. See the installation manual for
your sensor.
Wiring problem
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check for
internal electrical problems.
Vibration in pipeline at rate close to
sensor tube frequency
Check the environment and remove the source
of the vibration.
Damping value too low
Check the configuration.
See the appropriate section:
• Configure Flow Damping
Mounting stress on sensor
Erratic non-zero flow rate
when flow is steady
216
•
Configure Density Damping
•
Configure Temperature Damping
Check the sensor mounting to ensure:
• Sensor is not being used to support the
pipe
•
Sensor is not being used to correct pipe
misalignment
•
Sensor is not too heavy for pipe
Sensor cross-talk
Check the environment for sensor with a
similiar (±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Slug flow
See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow).
Damping value too low
Check the configuration. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Plugged flow tube
•
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
•
Purge the flow tubes.
Excessive or erratic drive gain
See Check the drive gain.
Output wiring problem
Verify wiring between transmitter and
receiving device. See the installation manual
for your transmitter.
Problem with receiving device
Test with another receiving device.
Wiring problem
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check for
internal electrical problems.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Table 16-6: Process variables problems and remedies (continued)
Symptom
Cause
Suggested remedy
Inaccurate flow rate
or batch rate
Bad flow calibration factor
Verify characterization. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Inappropriate measurement unit
Check calibration.
Bad sensor zero
Resize the flow meter. See Zero the meter.
Bad density calibration factors
Verify characterization. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Bad flow meter grounding
See Check grounding.
Slug flow
See Check for two-phase flow (slug flow).
Problem with receiving device
Test with another receiving device.
Wiring problem
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check for
internal electrical problems.
Problem with process fluid
Use standard procedures to check the quality
of the process fluid.
Bad density calibration factors
Verify characterization. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Wiring problem
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check for
internal electrical problems.
Bad flow meter grounding
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check
grounding.
Slug flow
Check the environment for sensor with a
similar (±0.5 Hz) tube frequency.
Sensor cross-talk
Check the sensor circuitry. See Check for
internal electrical problems.
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency. Purge
the flow tubes.
Incorrect sensor orientation
Sensor orientation must be appropriate to
process fluid. See the installation manual for
your sensor.
RTD failure
Check for alarm conditions and follow the
troubleshooting procedure for the indicated
alarm.
Physical characteristics
of the sensor have changed
Check for corrosion, erosion, or tube damage.
Temperature reading
significantly different
from process temperature
RTD failure
Check for alarm conditions and follow
troubleshooting procedure for indicated
alarm.
Temperature reading
slightly different
from process temperature
Sensor leaking heat
Insulate the sensor.
Unusually high density
reading
Plugged flow tube
Check drive gain and tube frequency.
Purge the flow tubes.
Incorrect K2 value
Verify characterization. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Inaccurate density
reading
Configuration and Use Manual
217
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 16-6: Process variables problems and remedies (continued)
Symptom
Cause
Suggested remedy
Unusually low density
reading
Slug flow
Use standard procedures to check the quality
of the process fluid.
Incorrect K2 value
Verify characterization. See Characterize the
meter (if required).
Unusually high tube frequency
Sensor erosion
Contact customer service.
Unusually low pickoff voltages
Plugged fow tube, corrosion, or
erosion
Purge the flow tubes.
Unusually low pickoff voltages
Several possible causes
See Check the pickoff voltage.
Unusually high drive gain
Several possible causes
See Check the drive gain.
16.28 Check sensor-to-transmitter wiring
A number of power-supply and output problems may occur if the wiring between the sensor and the
transmitter is improperly connected, or if the wiring becomes damaged.
Be sure to check all wiring segments:
•
If you have a 9-wire transmitter, check the wiring between the transmitter and the sensor junction box.
Prerequisites
You will need the installation manual for your transmitter.
Procedure
1. Before opening the wiring compartments, disconnect the power source.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to
do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Verify that the transmitter is connected to the sensor according to the information provided in the
installation manual.
3. Ensure the lower puck is fully seated on the feed-through pins.
4. Verify that the wires are making good contact with the terminals.
5. Check the continuity of all wires from the transmitter to the sensor.
16.29 Using sensor simulation for troubleshooting
Display
Menu → Service Tools → Sensor Simulation
ProLink III
Device Tools → Diagnostics → Testing → Sensor Simulation
When sensor simulation is enabled, the transmitter reports user-specified values for basic process variables.
This allows you to reproduce various process conditions or to test the system.
You can use sensor simulation to help distinguish between legitimate process noise and externally caused
variation. For example, consider a receiving device that reports an unexpectedly erratic density value. If sensor
simulation is enabled and the observed density value does not match the simulated value, the source of the
problem is likely to be somewhere between the transmitter and the receiving device.
You can enable sensor simulation using either the display or ProLink III software.
218
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Important
When sensor simulation is active, the simulated value is used in all transmitter outputs and calculations,
including totals and inventories, volume flow calculations, and concentration calculations. Disable all
automatic functions related to the transmitter outputs and place the loop in manual operation. Do not enable
simulation mode unless your application can tolerate these effects, and be sure to disable simulation mode
when you have finished testing. A power cycle will end sensor simulation.
16.30 Check for two-phase flow (slug flow)
Two-phase flow can cause rapid changes in the drive gain. This can cause a variety of measurement issues.
Procedure
1. Check for two-phase flow alerts (e.g., A105).
If the transmitter is not generating two-phase flow alerts, verify that two-phase flow limits have been
set. If limits are set, two-phase flow is not the source of your problem.
2. Check the process for cavitation, flashing, or leaks.
3. Monitor the density of your process fluid output under normal process conditions.
4. Check the settings of Two-Phase Flow Low Limit, Two-Phase Flow High Limit, and Two-Phase Flow
Timeout.
Tip
You can reduce the occurrence of two-phase flow alerts by setting Two-Phase Flow Low Limit to a lower
value, Two-Phase Flow High Limit to a higher value, or Two-Phase Flow Timeout to a higher value. For
most liquid applications, leaving the Two-Phase Flow High Limit at 5.0 g/cc will suffice.
16.31 Check the sensor coils
Checking the sensor coils can identify a cause for a no sensor response alert.
Restriction
This procedure applies only to 9-wire remote-mount transmitters. For integral mount transmitters, consult the
factory.
Procedure
1. Disconnect power to the transmitter.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, wait five minutes after disconnecting the power. Failure to
do so could result in an explosion causing death or injury.
2. Remove the wires from the sensor junction box.
3. Using a digital multimeter (DMM), check the pickoff coils by placing the DMM leads on the unplugged
terminal blocks for each terminal pair. See Table 16-7 for a list of the coils. Record the values.
Table 16-7: Coils and test terminal pairs
Coil
Sensor model
Terminal colors
Drive coil
All
Brown to red
Left pickoff coil (LPO)
All
Green to white
Right pickoff coil (RPO)
All
Blue to gray
Resistance temperature detector
(RTD)
All
Yellow to violet
Configuration and Use Manual
219
Troubleshooting
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table 16-7: Coils and test terminal pairs (continued)
Coil
Sensor model
Terminal colors
Lead length compensator (LLC)
All except T-Series, F025, F050, F100
A or B, F300 and CMF400 (see note)
Yellow to orange
Composite RTD
CMFS025-150 and T-Series
Yellow to orange
Fixed resistor (see note)
CMFS007, CMFS010, CMFS015,
CMF400, and F300
Yellow to orange
Note
The F300 and CMF400 fixed resistor applies only to certain specific F300 and CMF400 releases. Contact
customer support for more information.
There should be no open circuits, that is, no infinite resistance readings. The left pickoff and right
pickoff readings should be the same or very close (±5 Ω). If there are any unusual readings, repeat the
coil resistance tests at the sensor junction box to eliminate the possibility of faulty cable. The readings
for each coil pair should match at both ends.
4. Test the terminals in the sensor junction box for shorts to case.
a) Leave the terminal blocks disconnected.
b) Remove the lid of the junction box.
c) Testing one terminal at a time, place a DMM lead on the terminal and the other lead on the
sensor case.
With the DMM set to its highest range, there should be infinite resistance on each lead. If there is
any resistance at all, there is a short to case.
5. Test the resistance of junction box terminal pairs.
a) Test the brown terminal against all other terminals except the red one.
b) Test the red terminal against all other terminals except the brown one.
c) Test the green terminal against all other terminals except the white one.
d) Test the white terminal against all other terminals except the green one.
e) Test the blue terminal against all other terminals except the gray one.
f) Test the gray terminal against all other terminals except the blue one.
g) Test the orange terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and violet ones.
h) Test the yellow terminal against all other terminals except the orange and violet ones.
i) Test the violet terminal against all other terminals except the yellow and orange ones.
There should be infinite resistance for each pair. If there is any resistance at all, there is a short between
terminals.
Postrequisites
To return to normal operation:
1. Replace the lid on the sensor junction box.
Important
When reassembling the meter components, be sure to grease all O-rings.
220
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
A Using the transmitter display
This section explains how to use the display. Using the display, you can move through the menus, configure
the application, monitor and control the application, and perform maintenance and diagnostic tasks.
A.1 Components of the transmitter display
The transmitter display includes two status LEDs, a multi-line LCD panel, and four capacitive buttons — left, up,
down, and right — used to access the display menus and navigate the display screens.
Figure A-1: 1600 transmitter display
A. Status LED
B. LCD Display
Status LEDs
The status LEDs indicate the current state of the transmitter (STATUS). From the display, the symbol “√” on the
right side is the transmitter status LED. The symbol “NET” on the left side is the network status LED. The 1600
status LED supports NE107 mode. For configuration information, see the Micro Motion 1600 Transmitters with
Configurable Inputs and Outputs: Configuration and Use Manual.
Configuration and Use Manual
221
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Table A-1: Status LED and device status
Status LED condition
Device status
Solid green
No alerts are active.
Solid yellow
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Out of Specification,
Maintenance Required, or Function Check.
Solid red
One or more alerts are active with Alert Severity = Failure.
Flashing yellow (1 Hz)
Auto zero or SMV test in progress
Flashing green
An auto zero is being performed.
Status LED off
Transmitter is not receiving power.
Display is not seated or not functioning properly.
LCD panel
In normal operation, the LCD panel shows the current value of the display variables, and their measurement
units.
The LCD panel also provides access to the display menus and alert information. From the display menus, you
can:
•
View the current configuration and make configuration changes.
•
Perform procedures such as loop testing and zero verification.
•
Run batches.
The alert information allows you to see which alerts are active, acknowledge the alerts individually or as a
group, and to see more detailed information for individual alerts.
A.2 Access and use the display menus
The display menus allow you to perform most configuration, administration, and maintenance tasks.
The four switches, ⇦⇧⇩⇨, are used to navigate the menus, make selections, and enter data.
Procedure
1. Observe the action bar at the bottom of the LCD panel.
The action bar displays Menu⇨.
2. Hold your thumb or finger over the ⇨ membrane switch to activate it.
The top-level menu is displayed.
3. Navigate the menus using the four membrane switches:
• Activate ⇧ or ⇩ to scroll to the previous or next item in the menu.
•
Activate and hold ⇧ or ⇩ (approximately 1 second) to scroll rapidly through numbers or menu
options.
•
Activate ⇨ to drill down to a lower menu or to select an option.
•
Activate and hold ⇨ to save and apply your action.
•
Activate ⇦ to return to the previous menu.
•
Activate and hold ⇦ to cancel your action.
The action bar is updated with context-sensitive information. The ⇨ and ⇦ symbols indicate the
associated membrane switch.
222
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
If the menu or the topic is too large for a single display screen, the ⇩ and ⇧ symbols at the bottom and
top of the LCD panel are used to indicate that you must scroll down or up to see more information.
Figure A-2: Navigation arrows
Configuration and Use Manual
223
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
4. If you make a menu choice that leads back to the main menu, or changes to certain procedures such as
zero calibration:
• If display security is not enabled, the display prompts you to activate ⇦⇩⇨, in that order. This
feature protects against accidental changes to configuration, but does not provide any security.
Figure A-3: Security prompts
•
224
If display security is enabled, the display prompts you to enter the display password.
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
5. If you make a menu choice that requires entering a numeric value or character string, the display
provides a screen similar to the following:
Figure A-4: Numeric values and character strings
•
Activate ⇦ or ⇨ to position the cursor.
•
Activate ⇧ and ⇩ to scroll through the values that are valid for that position.
•
Repeat until all characters are set.
•
Activate and hold ⇨ to save the value.
6. To exit the display menu system, use either of the following methods:
• Wait until the menu times out and returns to the display variables.
•
Exit each menu separately, working your way back to the top of the menu system.
Configuration and Use Manual
225
Using the transmitter display
May 2024
226
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
May 2024
B Using ProLink III with the transmitter
B.1 Basic information about ProLink III
ProLink III is a configuration and service tool available from Micro Motion. ProLink III runs on a Windows
platform and provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Version requirements
Use the latest version of ProLink III and the device firmware to support all features. ProLink version 5.0 or later
is needed to recognize 1600 transmitters. For details about ProLink III device support, refer to the ProLink
III ChangeLog.txt file.
ProLink III requirements
To install ProLink III, you must have:
•
The ProLink III installation media
•
The ProLink III installation kit for your connection type:
— Cables and connectors: USB-C to USB-A cable or USB-C to USB-A adapter
To obtain ProLink III and the appropriate installation kit, contact customer support.
ProLink III documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with ProLink III or that you have a
general familiarity with Windows programs. If you need more information than this manual provides, see the
ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual.
In most ProLink III installations, the manual is installed with the ProLink III program. Additionally, the
ProLink III manual is available on the documentation CD or at Emerson.com.
ProLink III features and functions
ProLink III offers complete transmitter configuration and operation functions. ProLink III also offers a number
of additional features and functions, including:
•
A Professional version with expanded features not available on the Basic version
•
The ability to save the transmitter configuration set to a file on the PC, and reload it or propagate it to
other transmitters
•
The ability to log specific types of data to a file on the PC
•
The ability to view performance trends for various types of data on the PC
•
The ability to connect to and view information for more than one device
•
A guided connection wizard
These features are documented in the ProLink III with ProcessViz Software User Manual. ProLink III features
are not documented in this manual.
ProLink III messages
As you use ProLink III with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and notes. This
manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
Configuration and Use Manual
227
Using ProLink III with the transmitter
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
B.2 Connect with ProLink III
A connection from ProLink III to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the transmitter,
and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
B.2.1 ProLink III connection types
There are two ways to connect a Prolink III PC to the transmitter depending on how it has been ordered: the
service port or the communications protocol which is licensed for Channel A. This will be HART® over Bell 202
for Output hardware board code A or Modbus over RS-485 for output hardware board code M.
B.2.2 Connect ProLink III to the transmitter
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered
up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion, resulting in serious injury or death.
Prerequisites
For a service port connection, a USB-C to USB-A cable is supplied with the transmitter. For a Modbus®
connection, use an RS-485 converter connected to Channel A. No other Modbus host can be used for
communicating. For a HART® connection, use a Bell 202 converter connected to Channel A with a load resistor
(250-600 ohms).
You will need to know which comm port your converter is using. If you don't know the correct comm port, click
on the Connect via guided connection wizard button.
Procedure
1. Start ProLink III.
2. Choose Connect to Physical Device.
3. Select a Protocol and related settings:
•
For Ethernet connection:
— Select Modbus TCP
— Type in the IP Address of the transmitter
— Leave the remaining settings at their default values
4. Select Connect.
228
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
May 2024
C Using a field communicator with the
transmitter
C.1 Basic information about field communicators
A field communicator is a handheld configuration and management tool that can be used with a variety of
devices, including Micro Motion transmitters. It provides complete access to transmitter functions and data.
Field communicator documentation
Most of the instructions in this manual assume that you are already familiar with field communicators and can
perform the following tasks:
•
Turn on the field communicator
•
Navigate the field communicator menus
•
Send configuration data to the device
•
Use the alpha keys to enter information
Field communicator menus and messages
As you use a field communicator with a Micro Motion transmitter, you will see a number of messages and
notes. This manual does not document all of these messages and notes.
Important
The user is responsible for responding to messages and notes and complying with all safety messages.
C.2 Connect with a field communicator
A connection from a field communicator to your transmitter allows you to read process data, configure the
transmitter, and perform maintenance and troubleshooting tasks.
Prerequisites
The following HART® device description (DD) must be installed on the field communicator : 1600 Dev v1 DD V1
or later.
WARNING
If the transmitter is in a hazardous area, do not remove the housing cover while the transmitter is powered
up. Failure to follow these instructions can cause an explosion, resulting in serious injury or death.
Important
If the HART security switch is set to ON, HART protocol cannot be used to perform any action that requires
writing to the transmitter. For example, you cannot change the configuration, reset totalizers, or perform
calibration using a field communicator with a HART connection. When the HART security switch is set to OFF,
no functions are disabled.
Procedure
1. To connect to a point in the local HART loop, attach the leads from the field communicator to any point
in the loop and add resistance as necessary.
The field communicator must be connected across a resistance of 250–600 Ω.
Configuration and Use Manual
229
Using a field communicator with the transmitter
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
2. To connect to a point in the HART multidrop network, attach the leads from the field communicator to
any point on the network.
3. Turn on the field communicator and wait until the main menu is displayed.
4. If you are connecting across a multidrop network:
• Set the field communicator to poll. The device returns all valid addresses.
•
Enter the HART address of the transmitter. The default HART address is 0. However, in a multidrop
network, the HART address has probably been set to a different, unique value.
Postrequisites
To navigate to the Online menu, choose HART Application → Online. Most configuration, maintenance, and
troubleshooting tasks are performed from the Online menu.
Tip
You may see messages related to the DD or active alerts. Press the appropriate buttons to ignore the message
and continue.
Need help?
A field communicator requires a minimum of 1 Vdc across the connection leads to communicate. If necessary,
increase the resistance at the connection point until 1 Vdc is achieved.
230
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Concentration measurement matrices
May 2024
D Concentration measurement matrices
D.1 Standard matrices for the Concentration
Measurement application
The standard concentration matrices available from Micro Motion are applicable for a variety of process fluids.
These matrices are included in the ProLink III installation folder.
Tip
If the standard matrices are not appropriate for your application, you can build a custom matrix or purchase a
custom matrix from Micro Motion.
Matrix name
Description
Deg Balling
Matrix represents percent extract, by
g/cm3
mass, in solution, based on °Balling.
For example, if a wort is 10 °Balling and
the extract in solution is 100% sucrose,
the extract is 10% of the total mass.
°F
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Deg Brix
Matrix represents a hydrometer scale
for sucrose solutions that indicates the
percent by mass of sucrose in solution
at a given temperature. For example,
40 kg of sucrose mixed with 60 kg of
water results in a 40 °Brix solution.
g/cm3
°C
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Deg Plato
Matrix represents percent extract, by
mass, in solution, based on °Plato. For
example, if a wort is 10 °Plato and the
extract in solution is 100% sucrose, the
extract is 10% of the total mass.
g/cm3
°F
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
HFCS 42
Matrix represents a hydrometer scale
for HFCS 42 (high-fructose corn syrup)
solutions that indicates the percent by
mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
HFCS 55
Matrix represents a hydrometer scale
for HFCS 55 (high-fructose corn syrup)
solutions that indicates the percent by
mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
HFCS 90
Matrix represents a hydrometer scale
for HFCS 90 (high-fructose corn syrup)
solutions that indicates the percent by
mass of HFCS in solution.
g/cm3
°C
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
Configuration and Use Manual
Density unit
Temperature unit Derived variable
231
Concentration measurement matrices
May 2024
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
D.2 Derived variables and calculated process variables
The Concentration Measurement application calculates a different set of process variables from each derived
variable. The process variables are then available for viewing or reporting.
Calculated process variables
Derived
variable
Description
Density
at Reference
Mass/unit volume,
corrected to a given
reference temperature
✓
✓
Specific Gravity
The ratio of the density
of a process fluid at a
given temperature to
the density of water at
a given temperature
The two
given temperature
conditions do not need
to be the same.
✓
✓
Mass
Concentration
(Density)
The percent mass of
solute or of material in
suspension in the total
solution, derived from
reference density
✓
✓
Mass
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
The percent mass of
solute or of material in
suspension in the total
solution, derived from
specific gravity
✓
✓
Volume
Concentration
(Density)
The percent volume of
solute or of material in
suspension in the total
solution, derived from
reference density
✓
✓
Volume
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
The percent volume of
solute or of material in
suspension in the total
solution, derived from
specific gravity
✓
✓
Concentration
(Density)
The mass, volume,
weight, or number of
moles of solute or of
material in suspension
in proportion to the
total solution, derived
from reference density
✓
✓
Concentration
(Specific
Gravity)
The mass, volume,
weight, or number of
moles of solute or of
material in suspension
in proportion to the
total solution, derived
from specific gravity
✓
✓
232
Density at Standard
reference volume
temp
flow rate
Specific
gravity
Concentration
Net mass
flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
Net
volume
flow rate
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Emerson.com
Configuration and Use Manual
MS-00809-0200-1600
Environmental compliance
May 2024
E Environmental compliance
E.1 RoHS and WEEE
In compliance with the RoHS directive (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) and the WEEE directive (Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment), the battery in the Micro Motion 1600 Transmitter cannot be serviced or
replaced by users. If the transmitter requires disposal, follow all applicable local laws.
Configuration and Use Manual
233
* MS-00809-0200-1600*
MS-00809-0200-1600
Rev. AA
2024
For more information: Emerson.com/global
©2024 Micro Motion, Inc. All rights reserved.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of
Emerson Electric Co. Micro Motion, ELITE, ProLink, MVD
and MVD Direct Connect marks are marks of one of the
Emerson Automation Solutions family of companies. All
other marks are property of their respective owners.
">